JP2017140227A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board featuring performance means for a game board, such as a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine) and a reel game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: When both of a performance button 137 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, an operation result performance may be executed. No operation result performances are executed when only the right button 137d, or only the performance button 136 is operated from among the performance button 136 and the right button 137d.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 127

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known which are provided with directing means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the production means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a production means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
When both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be executed, and
In the state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is configured not to be executed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the production means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.15 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 31 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 32 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 33 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 34 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the production example in which a notice icon changes in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery during the display of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 41 in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and the digestion effect in steps. 47 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure shown in steps about the example of production using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the lottery table regarding notice item. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 62 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of effects which concerns on this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. (A) It is an example of the table of box data provided in RAM of the 1st sub control part, (b) It is an example of the table of parts data provided in RAM of the 1st sub control part. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the presentation control of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the presentation control of this embodiment. (A) is a flowchart of an effect system operation process, (b) is a flowchart of a chance button operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of button press. It is a flowchart of one time operation processing. It is a flowchart of one time operation processing. It is a flowchart of continuous hit operation processing. It is a flowchart of long press operation processing. It is a flowchart of other button operation processing. It is a flowchart of a setting display process at the time of determination button operation. It is a flowchart of a right button operation setting display process. (A) is a flowchart of a brightness | luminance setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user brightness setting operation process. (A) is a flowchart of a volume setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user volume setting operation process. It is a flowchart of a setting display process at the time of an upper button operation. (A) is a flowchart of a button long press process, (b) is a flowchart of a chance button long press operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing. It is a figure which shows the operation key unit shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 107 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.108 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the stand-by state (customer waiting state) which does not perform symbol variation display, (b) is the operation result of each button during symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example, (c) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 111. It is a figure explaining an example of setting operation using a production button and an operation key unit. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using an effect button and an operation key unit. (A) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the continuous operation by the effect button and the effect display during execution of the effect for repeated hitting, (B) by the effect button during the execution of the effect for repeated hitting It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between long press operation and effect display, (C) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between long press operation by the effect button and effect display during execution of the effect for long press. is there. (A) is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting, and (B) is the execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display at the time of performing long press operation by an effect button intermittently. It is a figure which shows in stepwise an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for long press centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 122 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of an effect performed in the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in an ornamental symbol display apparatus, and operation | movement of an effect button. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in an ornamental symbol display apparatus, and operation | movement of an effect button. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows in stepwise an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 137 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 141. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown by FIG. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the slot machine (cylinder machine) as a game stand which can apply this invention from the front side (player side). (A) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 73, a gaming table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. 1 to 73 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73 in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 73, the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for causing button 136 to emit light, ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return instruction for a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 5 (a) shows nine types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop pattern aspect. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch results and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially shown. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 14 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary figure. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 14A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 14A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), so that it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of FIG. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG.14 (c), the movement animation of the holding | maintenance icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 14D, the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 14E, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14G, an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 14 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 14 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 14 (j), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 14 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 14 (l). It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 14 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, has been moved to the lower right corner and is displayed in a reduced size in FIG. 14 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be the advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 14 in stages.

  In FIG. 15 (p) continuing from FIG. 14 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 15 (s). In FIG. 15 (s), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 15 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols determined to be 15R probability variation big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG.15 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 15 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 15 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached with a different decorative symbol (a symbol combination having a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, and a 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 14 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 15 (t). 15 (u ′), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 15 (v ′) following FIG. 15 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 15 (w ′) following FIG. 15 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a “big hit” character is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following step (q) in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 16 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 14 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 16 (b). In FIG. 16B, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 16C, like the case of FIG. 15T, all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 16 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” starts. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (e), the fourth symbol (round shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Here, FIG. 17A is a diagram for explaining a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 17B is a diagram for explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas. From the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of FIG. 2 is further displayed. Therefore, the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of displayable notice icons and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  One notice icon may be displayed for one area in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a hat notice icon I6 made up of a hat symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a carton box is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. A warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes made of symbols is displayed, a fan warning icon I10 made of a fan symbol is displayed in the warning icon third display area YA3, and a warning icon fourth display area YA4 A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed. In the notice icon fifth display area YA5, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are digested at the timing shown in FIG. To be controlled. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (the variation) shown in FIG. 17A is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the change icon display area 280, and the decorative symbol change display (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 (the hold icon h12 moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 17A) moves toward the change icon display region 280. When the decorative symbol change display (symbol change corresponding to the hold 2) is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the hat notice icon I6 is digested, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested thousand box notice icon I9 may be executed. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed since all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan warning icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan warning icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding variation) shown in FIG. 17 (a) is started, a Tonari-like effect that increases the notice icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. In this Tono-sama effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 starts, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a DJ effect is performed to increase the notice icon. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing the notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box to the notice icon display area 285 and displaying it is performed. Then, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the Tono-sama effect is executed, The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is out of place may be one, and the number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icons include those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are not clear, and those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are clear as shown in FIG. 18 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord are shown in the notice icon (preliminary notice icon before change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear. And a third icon notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the lord in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. Further, the second icon of the notice of the lord I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the lord in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third icon-notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the person in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of weak to strong. When the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, and the third lord's notice icon I3 are at a predetermined change display timing (for example, an increase display timing of the notice icon), FIG. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 18 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 18B at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing the symbol that is the object of prefetching. May be displayed before the screen, and may function as a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed along with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. In the case where the second noun notice icon I2 and the third noun notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the notice icon (6) of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and the ribbon are shown in the notice icon (the notice icon after the change) where the content of the corresponding effect is clear. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the watchmaster, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, there is a case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once. Here, the pseudo-continuous effects include a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gusset pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous effect, for example, as will be described later, when a pseudo-continuous effect starts, a long-length character appears, but the display mode of the long-length character is different from normal (for example, the long-length character is aura). In this case, the reliability is strong. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, the third pseudo-continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. Further, the pseudo-pattern effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing long-length character in the normal display mode. In addition, the pseudo-seam effect of the gaze pattern is an effect of performing a disappointing display as if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, as will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is strong, “Continue” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continue” in black letters with “continue” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the Oniwaban (Ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect in which the notice effect being executed is switched to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is notified in advance. Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is strong, “A freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, “Changing” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon simulating a ribbon worn by the Princess Chibi character, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the prefetch mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, there may be an effect of changing the displayed background from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (low stage change). Production). Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, “STECHEN” is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Also, if the reliability is weak, “STECHEN” may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Note that when the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, either the strong stage change effect or the weak stage change effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousand box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating the thousand box thrown by Tono-sama's character toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, strong or weak. If one thousand box notice icon I9 is digested and the jackpot reliability is strong, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is achieved. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notification, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (notification promotion). Production). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box, if the big hit is confirmed, “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, if the reliability is strong, the “A” pattern may be displayed as “elevated” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Further, if the reliability is weak, “elevated” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice that informs in advance that the jackpot is confirmed, or the premier reach where the jackpot is confirmed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach deviation is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). In the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the fan warning icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan notice icon I10 is consumed, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the content to produce produces changes with the timing when the fan notification icon I10 is digested, the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon simulating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest indication of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, shuriken notice icon I7, ribbon The notice icon I8, the carousel notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the digest display, and a corresponding effect may be executed. Or, there is a case where any notice icon is deleted without being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change described above is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed via the notice icon. It is also possible to display to delete the notice icon (the notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 18B: erase effect). In this effect, it is informed that the fluctuation is out of place. In other words, it is a gusset notice indicating that the pattern is a deviation confirmation pattern. Of course, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, there may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  19 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, A figure holding lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the 4th symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the 4th symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 14, and displays the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. For example, the fourth symbol display device 284 a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 200 and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a normal symbol changing notification region, a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. 1, and a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. While the regular symbol is stopped, the LED in the area where the quadrangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the regular symbol is changing, it is displayed blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit on and off, while the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is blinking or off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19A, the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 19A, no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and in response to this, the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs variation symbol display of the decorative symbol. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as necessary.

  Further, in FIG. 19A, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lighting in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and the holding is made. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 It is a display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 19 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 19 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 in FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. 1 second hold icon h12. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 in stages.

  In FIG. 20 (14) following FIG. 19 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is a change in the hold icon and the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 20 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the icon h0 and becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (17), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat and the warning of the thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (18). An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is the notice icon third display area. Displayed in YA3, fan notice icon I10 is displayed in notice icon fourth display area YA4. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 19 (10) to (12) is performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 20 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 20 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notification symbol in the first display area YA1. The display of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 20 (23), when two or more of the same notice icon are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two hat notice icons I6 are displayed, Although it is set in advance so that the displayed notice icon is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be determined at random, or may be set so that the notice icon displayed on the right side is preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate limited to those described above.

  Then, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 20 (25). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good. In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, for example, the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display form to the display form of the prefetching notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 20 (26), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “Continue”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 in stages.

  In FIG. 21 (28) continuing from FIG. 20 (27), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the watchdog character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It may be the decoration 1 ”) to form the reach state and start the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the left symbol and the right symbol, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, there is a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the Tono-like character. A display moving at a low speed from above to below is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed by notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed downward without being displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols out of place is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates that the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (34), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 21 (36). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 21 (37), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “Continue”, and then in FIG. In response to the digestion of the previous notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo-ream effect Is informed to the player that there is a possibility of starting.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the number-length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are changed from “decoration 1” to “decoration”. The decoration is changed to “decoration 2”, a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the “pseudo × 2” character information may be displayed in another area. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed. In this effect example, after the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is, the easier it is to win a big hit in one symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one hat notification icon I6 is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and in the case where two hat notification icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice, the hat It is easier to win if the two notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the hat notice icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-rendition is performed twice, and three hat notice icons I6 are digested. In the case where the pseudo-rendition effect is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win if the three hat notification icons I6 are digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-continuous effect has started.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 in stages.

  In FIG. 22 (43) following FIG. 21 (42), the decoration symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach production is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (44), the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (45) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. In other words, a display is performed in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the Senryoku notice icon I9 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (47), and above the enlarged Senryaku notice icon I9. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a production with higher reliability is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes with the character display of “promotion” at the timing of FIG. 22 (48). The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 22 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly dark, and the Tono-sama character appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Is it too hot” on the darkened background, and then FIG. 22 (52). Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter, and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (55), as shown in FIG. 22 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is deleted, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Soon, in FIG. 22 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 in stages.

  In FIG. 23 (58) following FIG. 22 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 23 (59), the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when two seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan warning icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fan is displayed in an enlarged manner at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan warning icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 23 (62), and the warning icon display area 285 is framed upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 23 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 23 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (66), the combination of the big-decided decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the re-variation effect is executed, resulting in a big hit. However, the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display area. If not displayed at 285, a re-change effect may not be performed, and an out-of-display result may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect that is executed after digesting the thousand-car box notice icon I9 is performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one of the thousand carousel notice icons I9 is digested, if the reach transition effect is executed as a fake notice corresponding to the digested thousand carousel notice icon I9, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of place. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice differs from the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be pre-ready notice. You may make it like, and it may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 24 to 26 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. 24 to 26, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 24 (8a) to (10a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9 a-1), the thrown first lord's notice icon I 1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (9a-2), after the first icon of the notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed to explode, the timing shown in FIG. 24 (10a) is displayed. Thus, the notice icon I1 of the exploded first lord is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Also according to this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 24 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 b), an effect display in which the first button notice icon I 4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon I4 is displayed. It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. Thus, in this effect example, until the effect button 136 is operated, the big hit reliability indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize, so the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the big hit reliability. May work and enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Also, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the digest effect of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136. An effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  FIGS. 24 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 c), as in FIG. 19 (8), an effect display in which the hat warning icon I 6 is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 24 (9 c), a state is shown in which the hat notice icon I 6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. Note that a gaze increase effect using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6 may be performed. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability, the harder the gaze increase effect may be.

  FIGS. 24 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 24 (7d) shows a state in which the Tono-like character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 19 (7). Thereafter, in FIG. 24 (8 d), there is an effect display in which not only one hat notice icon I 6 but also three hat notice icons I 6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the notice icon I6 of the three thrown hats is the notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2, and notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more in the notice icon display area 285, so that Since it is guaranteed that the performance is executed three times, it may be notified that the jackpot is determined. In addition, a high-reliability notice icon is unlikely to be displayed (not easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon is likely to be displayed (easy to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d '), a part or all of the thrown three hat notice icons I6 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, but from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production or the full gossip increase production which will be out of a frame.

  FIGS. 24 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (7), the character YM of Tono-sama, which has a warning icon I6 for a single box, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a warning icon I10 for a fan. A state in which is moved and displayed up to a predetermined throwing position is shown. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon selected at random. May be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 24 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and, for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notices executed can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of kinds of notices can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production which frames out from the left of an area | region, or the full gossip increase effect.

  FIG. 24 (12f-1) to FIG. 24 (12f-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in FIG. 24 (12f-1), as in FIG. 19 (12), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (12f-2), the decoration symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIG. 25 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display form by the Sabohani character), the character YM of Tono-sama displays the notice icon I6 of the hat as the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is thrown toward the camera is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 25 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the game board 200). It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the number of holds. The effect hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default light emission mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading notice light emission The drive control by the mode (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 25 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched, but in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  25 (8i) to FIG. 25 (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). In other words, in FIG. 25 (8i), as in FIG. 19 (8), the effect display in which the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 25 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat's notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (9 i-2), the notice icon of the hat notice I6 acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the prefetching notice display mode. An effect display (holding change effect) is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the hat warning icon I6 may not appear as the warning icon in the warning icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetching warning with the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed for a notice icon with a higher reliability of the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (9i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. In the case of displaying the number, after the hat notice icon I6 falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp in FIG. 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the pre-reading notice.

  25 (8j) to FIG. 25 (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 25 (8j) is different from FIG. 19 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area instead of the Tono-sama character YM (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8j), the DJ character appears with a hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and displays the hat's previous notice icon I6 as the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display is put on. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  25 (8k) to FIG. 25 (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8k), the DJ character appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (9k), a hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-carton box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by placing it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in the carton box so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 that is thrown by the character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, a notice icon overwriting effect may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

  FIG. 25 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 25 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the corresponding character notation. For example, a “continuation” character is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1, and the warning icon I9 for the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2 is displayed. Is displayed with an additional character “Elevation”, and the fan ’s warning icon I10 displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is additionally displayed with “Blessing”. The shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the area YA4 is indicated by a letter “Chang eyes”, and the ribbon notice icon I8 displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 has “STECHEN” A character is added and displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the sixth notice area YA6 of the notice icon displays “question” along with “question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed afterwards.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (12l ′) and FIG. 25 (12l ″), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are displayed as “question marks” to clearly show the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified in advance that an effect display in which a big hit is determined is executed according to a combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. As shown in (12l "'), when three hat notification icons I6 with the" continuation "character notation are displayed in the notification icon display area 285, four pseudo-decisions are made to determine the big hit. You may make it notify that an effect display including a continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character added and displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when “promotion” is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for notifying that the result of the symbol variation display when the is digested is a big hit confirmed (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the example of production described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of Tono-sama character YM or DJ character BY. However, in the example of production shown in FIG. 26, an effect of increasing the notice icon by displaying a decorative symbol is provided. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 26 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a reach effect is started. This reach production is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of the hat, a character notation “stock” is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is notified of an increase in the notice icon. doing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the display of moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  In FIG. 26 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Normal reach production begins.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first lord's notice icon symbol imitating the first lord's notice icon I1 is stopped and displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the character notation “stock” is appended to the first icon of the first icon, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that an advance notice icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the notice icon design of the first lord is changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, and the display moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 26 (B4), the decorative symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result is a display error. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to a hat notice icon I6. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 for the hat, and may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the next and subsequent symbol variation display. You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  Next, another effect example of the notice icon digest effect described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 27-30 is a figure which shows in step-by-step another example of a notice icon digest effect. 27 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  27 (38m) to FIG. 27 (40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 21 (38) to FIG. 21 (40). In FIGS. 27 (38m) to (39m), the same effects as in FIGS. 21 (38) to (39) are performed, but in FIG. 27 (40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is slow. As shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2), the quasi-continuous pattern appears at a high speed immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern becomes the stop display position of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2). Is scrolled down to the lower side of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-3), the combination of the decorations of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and the fluctuation is displayed. Then, it is informed that the result of the stop display is a result of the deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  27 (23n) to FIG. 27 (24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23n), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, but as shown in FIG. 27 (24n), the digested hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and a notice that the digested effect is not performed is given.

  FIGS. 27 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23o), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place without starting the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 27 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2”). -The combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2”) is displayed with temporary stop and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is out of place. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  FIGS. 27 (22p) to (23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, in FIG. 27 (23p), in the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon). There may be an effect in which not the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1) but other notice icons are digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 27 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icon may not be digested in order from the left. In this embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the order in which they are stocked). However, the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when a notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to make a big hit, and conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the order in which the notice icons are digested may be determined regardless of the order of the stock. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected. You may make it do. In addition, a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be digested in a specific order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the shuriken A rule may be set such that a jackpot is determined when digested in the order of a notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, and a shuriken notice icon I7. As a result, the player may have an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, and may improve the game motivation.

  FIG. 27 (24q-1) to FIG. 27 (24q-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing for changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digest effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is ended.

  28 (Aa) to FIG. 28 (Ae) show an effect example in the case where the notice icon increase effect is performed after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (Aa), after the shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing indicated by 28 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and it is notified that the display result is a deviation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon is performed by Tono-sama character YM. Then, when the warning icon I9 of the thousand box is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ae), the warning icon No. 3 which has become blank due to the digestion of the shuriken warning icon I7. A notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested may be displayed.

  FIG. 28B shows an effect example in the case where the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area in accordance with the digestion of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM When the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed and the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icon is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. The first sub-control unit It may be set in advance at 400. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. However, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the display areas that are blank in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. You may make it suggest that it displays on the display area 285, and you may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot is the highest.

  FIG. 28C shows an effect example in the case where the effect of digesting the notice icon and the effect of increasing the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is performed, and a state in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol change display executed before the symbol change display is executed. In this manner, the notice icon digestion effect and the notice icon increase effect may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, there may be a case where the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the notice icon increase effect is performed. Further, after the notice icon digestion effect starts, the notice icon increase effect may start, after the notice icon increase effect starts, the notice icon digest effect starts, or the notice icon The digesting effect and the notice icon increasing effect may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the announcement effect of the announcement icon is increased. It may be a region that will be blank before it is started.

  FIG. 28 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), before the notice icon digestion effect is started, an effect is given which indicates whether or not the notice icon is digested. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon is digested when the notice icon subject to digestion starts shaking and fluctuating. I try to speak. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), when the fan warning icon I10 is deleted without being digested, the display is stopped after the stop with the combination of the decorative symbols out of place. You may alert | report.

  FIGS. 28 (59s) to 60s (60s) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 23 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 28 (59 s), the notice icon display area 285 displays two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Is different from the above, and after the fluctuation variation starts with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, a notice of a big hit is given, and as shown in FIG. 28 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, a hat notice icon I6) are digested, they are left as they are. You may make it alert | report that it stops and displays by the combination of the decoration pattern of, and it will become off.

  28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (32t) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 21 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (23t), in this effect example, an in-digest notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 28 (23t) to 25 (t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digestion advance notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 28 (28t) to FIG. 32 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digest notice notice icon display area YA0 continues to be displayed after digestion, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect). ) Will continue to be displayed. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be after the notice effect of the notice icon has started, or before the notice icon has been digested. Alternatively, it may be simultaneously with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased may be after the digest effect of the notice icon has ended, or before the digest effect of the notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the end of the notice icon digestion, after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon ends. It may be at the same time as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, or before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts. It may be simultaneously with the end of the corresponding production, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation when the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol) or being digested The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digest notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 22 (44), or only the notice icon display area YA0 during digest is erased). Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digest icon notice area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A digested first is the digest icon of the notice icon A. It may be erased after or after the presentation is finished, and no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, or the digest effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be erased at the same time as or after starting, or erased at the same time or after the notice icon b displayed in the in-digest notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. For example, while the notice icon B is being digested, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice icon B may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased, and the advance notice is given. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the region 285 and the digesting advance notice icon display region YA0 may be deleted.

  FIGS. 29 (Aa) to 29 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 29 (Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon for the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 on the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested respectively. Production begins. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be an order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ab), they are enlarged and each character display is additionally displayed. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is added and displayed near the lower portion of the enlarged hat notice icon I6, and a character display of “stechen” is added near the lower portion of the enlarged notice icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the ribbon notice icon I8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ac), after the shoji is closed and Princess Chibi's character CH appears on the front side, the shoji opens as shown in FIG. 29 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. During execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and it will be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ae), the decorative symbol that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the chord character BC Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and then the player is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. .

  In this example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icons are made different from each other, but they may be started at the same time.

  29 (66u-1) to FIG. 29 (66u-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 23 (66). That is, in FIG. 29 (66u-1), the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, and it is informed that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. In addition, it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-3), after the big hit round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area while the big hit game is being executed, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect informing that the probability change big hit is confirmed). For example, FIG. In the example shown in -3), if the hat notice icon I6 is digested during the jackpot game, a notification is made that the probable big hit is confirmed, and the fan notice icon I10 is digested. May notify that 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when other notice icons are digested, for example, a meaning that suggests that there is a possibility of promotion may be given. In this way, even if the same notice icon is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the jackpot game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 29 (Ba) to FIG. 29 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ba), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 29 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when a stage change is performed. Note that after a stage change, the notice icon may be deleted, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or may not be deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 29 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-2), Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. The type of notice icon to be notified is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (23v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is digested. Even if the advance notification of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance may be digested. May be. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  FIG. 29 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, a notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the digest of the notice icon. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. An effect corresponding to is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the Bancho character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. In the event that an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as determining the jackpot, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit is made when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probable change state or a short time state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit is made in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned after the probability change state or the time-short state is finished. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it may not carry over after a probability change state and a time-short state are complete | finished.

  Next, description will be made on an effect example in which the contents of the reach effect to be transferred thereafter are notified depending on the type of the notice icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged-length character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-1). Appears, and then shifts to a Bancho Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-2), when the Senryoku box notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-2), the enlarged Tono-like character YM3 is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the Tono-sama reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-3), when the fan warning icon I10 is digested, the enlarged princess character HM is then displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, this production example corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot meaning the notice icon, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach production is configured in the order of Hime Reach> Tonosama Reach> Bancho Reach Yes. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a Tono-like character enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called collapse of the law occurs). May be configured to determine the jackpot. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of notice icons may be digested, and a plurality of characters may appear correspondingly, so that the combination notice is executed. In addition, a specific effect for digesting multiple notice icons (multiple digest-only effect) may be executed, and it is a big hit if multiple notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested The reliability may be high.

  Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a is displayed together with a button reception time meter as shown in FIG. Notifying that the operation can be accepted, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect performed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described button reach effect, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 30 (Cb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 30 (Cc). In this way, the project button button 136 changes to a projecting button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button reach production with higher jackpot reliability has been promoted.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 32 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 34 step by step.

  In FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 32 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon has been changed from the notice icon I6 for the hat to the notice icon I1 for the first lord. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. In addition, as for the effects performed between FIG. 32 (14) and FIG. 32 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice icon increase effect are changed to the first icon notice icon I1. 20 is the same as FIG. 20 (15) to FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (20), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 32 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 32 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 32 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as when four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially digest the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Also, which notice icon is used may be determined at random, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be digested with priority. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32 (25), a character display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (26), the character display of “continue” attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon first display area YA1 in the advance notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed is displayed. Gray-out display may be used, or character information “Done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  32 (27) to 33 (33), the digested hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. Except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, this is the same as FIG. 20 (27) to FIG. 21 (33). Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (34), the display of digesting the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 33 (36), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (37), the “continuation” character display added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon second display area YA2 in the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (38) to (45) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. 21 (38) to FIG. 22 (), except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (46), the display of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a thousand box notice icon I9 at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a higher-reliability effect is additionally displayed above the displayed notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “promotion” attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is erased and the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (48). In addition, the display to move to the original display position, that is, the third icon display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 34 (49), the reach transition effect described above is started. In this production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 34 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the production display in which a power failure has occurred, and then the strong reach with high reliability. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach production in this production example is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (50-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Is it a chance?” Is displayed on the darkened background. The character “NO” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (50-2). Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed, the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (55), as shown in FIG. 34 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 34 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1".

  In FIG. 34 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of the first icon of the first icon displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan's notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan warning icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the original display position, that is, the warning icon fourth display area in the warning icon display area 285 is displayed. Display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 35 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 35 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the big hit is confirmed “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 are diagrams showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon step by step. 36 to 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 36 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which the third lord's notice icon I 3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I 1. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 36 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8b), as in FIG. 31 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9 b), it is shown that the first lord's notice icon I 1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of frame from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect using the notice icon of Tonosama.

  FIGS. 36 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8c), there is an effect display in which not only one first lord notice icon I1 but also three first lord notice icons I1 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown become notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon in notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. Further, a high-reliability notice icon (for example, the third lord's notice icon I3) is unlikely to be displayed (not stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first lord's notice icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (first lord's notice icon I1) is increased by three, but a plurality of kinds of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example, The first lord's notice icon I1 and the third lord's notice icon I3 may be increased simultaneously.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (9c ′), some or all of the thrown three first lord's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is displayed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect or all the gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of the display area of the display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 36 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the character YM of the character uses the notification icon I1 of the first character as the notification icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 36 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold number display is performed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 36 (8 f), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched. However, in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  36 (8g) to FIG. 36 (9g-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8g), as in FIG. 31 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (9g-2), the first lord's notice icon I1 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the prefetching notice is made. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is not displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed by using a notice icon other than the first lord's notice icon I1, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  FIG. 36 (12h-1) to FIG. 36 (12h-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in FIG. 36 (12h-1), in the same manner as in FIG. 31 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the first icon notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (12h-2), the decorative symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIGS. 37 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 37 (8i) is different from FIG. 31 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, not the Tono-sama character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (9i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and the first icon of the first lord is provided with the first notice icon I1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 37 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9j), the first icon notification icon I1 thrown by the character YM is displayed in the notification icon first display area YA1 of the notification icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is placed on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if passing.

  FIGS. 37 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third icon-like notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9k), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first lord of the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY puts the third lord's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a warning icon with low jackpot reliability with a warning icon with high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 37 (121) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed with the character notation “question mark”. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. A notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, a notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and a notice of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. A notice icon I3 is displayed, and a notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and a character notation “question mark” is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ′), for some of the notification icons before the change, the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified by text. For example, the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation “question mark” attached thereto and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA3 is annotated with the letter “Chang eyes” and changed to a shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the word “continue” and changes to the hat notice icon I6. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6 is marked with “continuation” and “question mark” and is changed to a hat notice icon I6. Yes. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be gradually notified over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the notice icons after the change, and the notice icon after the change is displayed. A corresponding character notation may be added to only the thing.

  FIGS. 38 (8m-1) to FIG. 38 (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 38 (8m-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8m−1), the DJ character BY appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 38 (9m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the Thousand Boxes is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the preview icon I9 of the Thousand Box in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the preview icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this example, the notification icon before change may be overwritten from the notification icon after change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 38 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 38 (8n-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8n-2), the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n) As the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area is thrown. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first lord's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notification icon after the change may be overwritten from the notification icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the first notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change is changed to the notice icon before the overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon after overwriting is digested than the notification icon before being overwritten, or the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may not be changed.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 39 is a figure which shows the example of an effect which a notice icon changes in steps. In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39A, a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears during the variation display of the decorative symbol. The placard is marked with the text “I will change” and notifies that the display mode will change for either the notice icon or the hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 39 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 39 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed as the pre-reading notice display mode. To change. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change. In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, but displays it in a reduced size on the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  And as shown in FIG.39 (C), in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208, the Princess Chibi chance effect is performed. The Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned usual-game variable game is executed. Chibi princess chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery. The princess Chibi character selects one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the displayed icon will be executed. For example, if the Chibi princess character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the wing member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is informed of the long opening, When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, the result of the symbol change display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached In advance, it is notified that the usual fluctuation display result is out of place.

  Furthermore, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by Tonentsu's notice icon is reached, as shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the third icon-like notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  When the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 39 (D2), at least one of the default display mode hold icons in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that is the default display mode is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change.

  In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example when power is interrupted or restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power interruption / recovery occurs while displaying the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, respectively, and in the notice icon third display area YA3, a thousand boxes are displayed. A warning icon I9 is displayed, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 40 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 40 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power is restored instantaneously. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40C, a character display “Please wait for a while during restoration” is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a special display result “special figure I”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. When the power is interrupted / restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In the case of power interruption / recovery, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was the display mode of the pre-reading notice is also the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undecided” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undecided” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The prefetching notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved holds are consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for newly added hold (holding in which the pre-reading result is saved) after power interruption / recovery, and the pre-reading notice is given after all the hold containing “undecided” information is digested. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a pre-reading notice may be made before the hold containing “undecided” information is used.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 41 in stages. 41 to 42, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 41, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 41 (1) shows a display corresponding to FIG. 19 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a large size in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. The second decorative symbol display area is formed above the reserved icon display area 281 and the third decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 19 (5). The second decorative symbols displayed in the second decorative symbol display area are configured such that after the change starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the confirmation stops.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM, unlike FIG. 19 (6), possesses notice icon I21 of “house” in which the letters “house” are circled.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” possessed at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (5), the thrown “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (6). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the Tono-sama character YM has successfully displayed the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41 (7) to (8), a display in which the character YM is framed out downward of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “print” notice icon I22 in which the “print” character is circled.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (12), the notice “I” is held at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (13). An effect display to throw toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (14), the thrown “print” notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, after the effect display similar to FIG. 41 (6) is performed, the effect display similar to FIG. 41 (7) to FIG. 41 (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (19) following FIG. 41 (18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon The display that the notice icon I22 of the “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “home” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 include the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon first display area YA1. A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be erased after the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested. Note that the timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be erased when an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started, or an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued afterwards. Also, the timing of starting the movement of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be the same, or the movement start of the “house” notice icon I21 is “mon” notice icon I22. It may be earlier than the start of the movement, or the start of movement of the “mon” notice icon I22 may be earlier than the start of the movement of the “house” notice icon I21.

  Thereafter, when the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) The family crest character 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 displays a family crest in which an effect image to that effect is displayed. Fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (22), it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Since the contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, description thereof will be omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding two notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”) are digested, so that a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured. It should be noted that even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be ensured that the symbol variation display is a big hit, or a loss result may be obtained. Further, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the crest dropping effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is lost. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit is more easily digested than the symbol variation display that is lost, such as the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22). It may be configured.

  FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 43 to 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIG. 43 (a1) differs from FIG. 41 (5) in that the “mon” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 43 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a3), the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “house” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1). The At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of “house” and “mon”), not the order of “mon” and “house”. Also, as shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the “mon” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the order of “mon” and “house”. In this production example, whether it is shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the above-described family crest drop production is performed. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of “house” and “print” (ie, correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed, and the order of “print” and “house” (ie, When the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the crest drop effect is less likely to start than when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured.

  FIG. 43 (b1) to FIG. 43 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b1), only the “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “pattern” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon display area 285 to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b2), when only the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it vibrates in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “preparing family crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest drop effect is performed is performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And Tono-sama production has started. At this time, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “monkey” notice icon I22. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b4), when the Tono-sama character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the “monkey” notice icon I22 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Are displayed in the second display area YA2.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the crest character 224B once retreats to the initial position, so that it is easy to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but it does not retreat to the initial position and the curling operation is continued. Also good. On the other hand, the character display of “preparing family crest” is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b6), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the crest character 224B that has been withdrawn descends again and resumes the scooping action. In this effect example, for example, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest character 224B descends, and FIG. The family crest drop effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. In FIG. 43 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “print” notice icon I22 displayed later is digested. At this time, the “print” notice icon I22 may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  43 (c1) to 43 (c2-3) show other examples of the effect of digesting the notice icon. In this effect example, a state in which a background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “Mr.” in which the character “Mr.” is circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The “princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the “２” notice icon I33 in which the character “爺” is circled is notified. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  FIG. 43 (c2-1) shows a state of the background display after the three notice icons of the “donor” notice icon I31, the “princess” notice icon I32, and the “爺” notice icon I33 are digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image with the face of the frog up from the left side of the display screen and the face of Tono-sama are displayed. A background display in which the up image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the reliability to the jackpot in the symbol variation display Is configured to display a background display indicating that the value is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. ”Notice icon I32>“ 爺 ”notice icon I33, the reliability may be the highest, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set as appropriate. .

  Also, in FIG. 43 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for "Tono", the notice icon I32 for "Princess", and the notice icon I33 for "Morning", the notice icon I32 for "Princess" The state of the background display after only the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and a face of the frog. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. Although the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” may be digested. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, “Tono” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I31 of “I” and the notification icon I33 of “爺”, the notification icon I32 of “princess”, and the notification icon I33 of “爺” are digested, and the notification icon I31 of “To” And when the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  Also, in FIG. 43 (c2-3), only the notice icon I33 for “爺” among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is shown. The state of the background display after is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which an image with the face of the frog is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In this embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit in is lower than that in the case where the two notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the “の う ち” notice icon I33 is digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and for example, the “donor” notice icon I31 is digested. Alternatively, the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or the notice of “予 告” is given. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested than when the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested However, these may be set as appropriate.

  Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 for “Tono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 for “princess” or “や” is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I33 is displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed. In addition, for example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are displayed, the “Tono” notice icon I31 and “」 ”notice icon I33 are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “爺” notice icon I33 are displayed, and the “don” notice icon I31 and “爺” When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  In this example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, so-called law breaking may be reported to notify that the jackpot is confirmed.

  In addition, when three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon is displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Also, in this production example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 is digested, the Tono-sama character appears and the Tono reach is started, and when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the fox character may appear and the heel reach may be started. In addition, when the “Ichi” notice icon I33 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are digested, the niece character and the princess character appear, and the niece & princess reach is started, and the “Tono” notice icon is displayed. When I31 and the princess's notice icon I32 are digested, the Tono-sama character and the princess's character appear and the lord and princess reach starts, and the lord's notice icon I31 and the niece's notice icon When I33 is digested, a Tono-sama character and a spear character may appear and the Tono & Samurai reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono”, the notice icon I32 of “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “Tatsumi” are digested, the Tono-sama character, the Princess character, and the Samurai character appear and Tono & Princess & Samurai Reach may be started. Thus, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned reach effect or background display notice. For example, the effect mode in jackpot game or the mode during symbol change may be changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as a character that increases the notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the production performed when the notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. An effect by a corresponding light emission pattern may be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, there is a case where an effect may be given for each when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested and when the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “mon” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state with “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (d2), the decorative symbol display device 208 digests only the “house” notice icon I21 out of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “print” notice icon I22. The situation is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested and changed to a chance symbol which is a special symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. There is a case where a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be transferred. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image, it may be shifted to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the crest hero B 224B are not dropped to the swordsman reach. You may make it transfer. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-3), there may be a case where the normal reach effect is started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” and then at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (d4-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the crest challenge reach has been performed is performed. The first decorative symbol is fluctuated while maintaining the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (d5-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the Tono-sama character YM pulls the “print” notice icon I22 with a rope. This suggests that the icon I22 is attracted to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4), when the Tono-sama character YM succeeds in attracting the “monkey” notice icon I22, the family crest member 224B falls as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is displayed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the digestion of the “monkey” notice icon I22 is successful. In addition, after the family crest drop effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above is transferred.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4a), there is a case where the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the drawing of the “monkey” notice icon I22 fails. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach described above may be entered. In this case, the reliability with respect to the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the drawing icon “I22” of the “print” is successfully pulled. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the pulling of the “print” notice icon I22 fails, the process proceeds to FIG. 44 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the “monkey” notice icon I22 is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that a family crest falling effect is more likely to occur when the “monstrength” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “family” notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be possible.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "mon" notice icon I22, "donor" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "爺" notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon that resembles an icon. For example, a notice icon for “U”, a notice icon for “鮫”, a notice icon for “old”, a notice icon for “subject”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the “home” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested, the crest dropping effect may not be performed, or the “house” notice icon and the “mon” notice icon are digested. The crest dropping effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the “house” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested than when the house icon is digested. In addition, a notice icon such as “鮫” may be changed to a notice icon such as “mon”.

  Moreover, in the example of production described above, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirement for the word to be formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be used for this production example. For example, a notice icon for “question”, a notice icon for “similar”, and a notice for “ren” When three icons are digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed.

  Also, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 for “Home” and the notice icon I22 for “Crest”, there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285. The “home” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Further, only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not display the notice icon is displayed. When the space 285 is empty, the display may be increased, or when the space for the warning icon display region 285 is not empty, the displayed warning icon may not be digested in the first place. In addition, even if the notice icon display area 285 is empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

  Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of the notice icon display area 285 is not displayed until the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested, for example, “House” When the previous notice icon I21 is digested, the "mon" notice icon I22 may be digested together, or the "house" notice icon I21 may be digested.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and an increase effect and a digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 45 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is a subject of the pre-reading notice, and the display mode is other hold icons (for example, the first hold icon). The hold icon h11) is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, shows how various parts are added. In FIG. 45 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows the state. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating a snowman's head.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the unjust merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the unscrupulous merchant character EC is out of the frame, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the Tono-sama character YM has moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e4), an effect display in which the third notice part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, Tono-like character YM is out of frame in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 41 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 45 (e6) shows a state in which the display result of the losing is derived, and the variation display of FIG.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. For example, the notification display area 287 informs that the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice, or the display form of the hold icon that is already the display form of the pre-reading notice indicates that the big hit is reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high degree. Also, a jackpot notice display in the symbol variation display being executed is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that a notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e7), the variable display of symbols is started in the Chan throughlet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the third notice part P3 is digested. This third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses a fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model imitating the head constituting the first hold icon h11 that is a display mode of a snowman. The DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P in the notice icon display area 285 is covered. The effect display put on 2 display area YA2 is performed. It should be noted that the symbols are still displayed in the change display area 287.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e10), the display result in which the letters “Get” are displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the trunk constituting the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of a snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 45 (e11 ′), the first notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 in which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. You may make it display once (stock) on display area YA1. In this case, the notification icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1, but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notification icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (e12), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this production example, the variation icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but may be deleted. Note that the fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 45 (e13), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wound around the neck of the fluctuation icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the fluctuation icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. In addition, when the display form of this completed snowman is a holding icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the fluctuation is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, but may be mounted when, for example, a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 45 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 4, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the swordsman reach, the fourth notice part P4 is digested and attached to the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e15-2). You may make it do. Here, since the change icon h0 shifts to super reach, the change icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 frame out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, functions as a prefetch notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not subject to prefetching. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 that can be applied to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestion effect in steps, and FIG. 47 is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 46 in steps. 46 to 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 46, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. 46 to 47 are different from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the Tono-sama character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. Note that the display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is performed, and further notification that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, every time the displayed display area is filled with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the Tono-sama character YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. When the Tono-sama character YM possesses one notice icon when the Tono-sama production is started, one display area is displayed when the Tono-sama character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM has three notice icons, the Ton-sama character YM may increase the display area by three when the action of throwing the notice icon is performed. All the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice notice area) composed of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. The icon display area) is displayed in a reduced size, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) composed of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed. This second notice icon A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing at which the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the preview icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the number of notice icon stocks is displayed instead of the preview icon display area 285. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (3), the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses is shown in the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (4). An effect display that is thrown toward is performed. In this example, the hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B may not be straddled, for example, the first decorative design display device. The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear on the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 46 (6), In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which Tono-sama's character YM has succeeded in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby notifying that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect effect will be executed in the future. Thereafter, Tono-sama character YM goes out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  FIG. 46 (7) is stopped and displayed with a combination of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” in the first ornamental symbol display device 208A, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. 46 (8), the first decoration symbol display device 208 A displays “decoration 7-decoration 6”. -The decoration display of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 46 (10), the first notification icon first display icon 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed. The display of digesting the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it may be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Note that when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (11), the digested hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (12). Is done. In addition, the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (11) displays the first decoration symbol display timing when switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208B to the background display. It may be the timing when the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (12) is enlarged.

  In FIG. 47 (13) continuing from FIG. 46 (12), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. The timing for switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 47 (14), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the “continue” character display, and the second decorative symbol display device 208B provides the notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  After that, the enlarged character BC2 appears at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (16), and is displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then, FIG. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, there is an effect display in which the Bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. This is done to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the chief character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 47 (16), it is not necessary for the character BC2 with the longest length to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display straddling” is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Alternatively, the image may be displayed integrally with the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, a display may be performed in which the display moves from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbols are framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the display moves at a low speed downward. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (19). Thereafter, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment, and FIG. 50 shows the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of digestion production in steps. 48 to 50, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  48 (a1) to FIG. 48 (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 46 to 47, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and a variable display of symbols is performed. Since the contents displayed in the chamber lettuce display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps the approximate center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is conspicuous. Note that the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 48 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a4), after the notice icon I6 for the hat derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the variation display of FIG. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased at a timing before the end of the variation display in FIG. Further, in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is displayed and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), even after the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B maintains the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display region 285A are consumed is completed. Whether to raise the 2 decorative design display device 208B can be set as appropriate. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the variation display of special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is the result of the loss. "Is stopped and displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 48 (a6-2) shows a state in which two pending reservations have been consumed and the symbol variation display, which is a prefetch target, has started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the first decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol is changed. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the hat notice icon I6 is expanded as shown in FIG. 48 (a7-2). Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed so as to protrude from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. Is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that it can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation ends.

  48 (b1) to 48 (b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the number of notice icon display is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208). An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. This notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) where the notice icon is displayed.

  48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b3) have the same effect contents as FIG. 20 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, A state in which the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. In other words, in FIG. 48 (b1), only one hat warning icon I6 is displayed in the warning icon display area 285, so that the warning icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. Yes. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b2), Tono-sama character YM throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, fan notice icon I10). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. It should be noted that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called “gase” is displayed). When the above-described three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the previous notice icons is reduced by 1, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. Note that the timing for displaying the value of the display device for displaying the number of notice icons displayed in a reduced manner may be the time before the notice icon is digested, or at the same time as the notice icon is digested. It may be the timing after digestion. Note that, as shown by surrounding with a broken line, even if the notice icon is digested, the value is not decreased, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this production example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments. For example, the operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as an effect movable body, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a predetermined pattern emit light, sound, a decorative symbol display device (decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other You may make it alert | report the display number of a notice icon by a decorative design display apparatus etc.).

  49 (c1) to 49 (c9) are produced using two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 46 to 47. There is a difference in using a display device of the same size. 49, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 49 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, The mode is, for example, a default display mode as with the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are arranged. It arrange | positions so that it may overlap substantially. The first decorative symbol display device 208C displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281. A change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations are displayed. Corresponding to the numbers, “2” and “0” are displayed, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 49 (c1). At the timing shown in Fig. 4, the decorative symbols are being changed. In addition, in the lower right corner portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-described chamberlet display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c1), the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed. It is shown. The background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (c1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan throughlet display area 287, the second decorative design display device 208D displays the first decorative design as shown in FIG. 49 (c2). The display device 208C is lowered to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed. However, the size of the symbol is reduced and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 49 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c3), the number of holds is one, and therefore, in the special figure 1 second hold number display H1, “1” indicating that fact is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the shuriken notice icon I7. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 49 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” as a result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the loss is a chance, and it is informed that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 49 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is notified that the second pseudo-continuous notice will be performed. As the second hat notice icon I6 is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And it comes to be displayed on the whole two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped. An effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the long-length character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (c9), when a decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeric symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved away from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D are displayed. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that an accessory placed on the back side of the device 208D is visible, and further, the accessory can be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 49D shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 49 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. The three decorative symbol display devices may all have the same size.

  The fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (d), the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 respectively display the notice icon I6 of the hat, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed on the screen is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes is displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. There may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Moreover, there may be a decorative symbol display device that does not display the effect display related to the notice icon. This can be applied to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 50 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, in FIG. 50, the first decorative symbol display device 208H disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with protruding frame portions on the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J includes an upper end side, a lower end side and a right end side. The frame portions are provided so as to protrude from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are each configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 50 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 22 (47), which covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The swordsman reach is shown. That is, in FIG. 50 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the thousand carton box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested and noticed that the transition to a more reliable production is made. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to move in directions close to each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to a position closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is hardly visible. It becomes a state. At this time, the reach decoration effect as shown in FIG. 22 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. In other words, the reach effect display that has been executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J is slightly darkened, and the Tono-sama character appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed. A display that cuts off the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect has been started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 50 (e7), “decoration 1-decoration 2—over the second ornamental symbol display device 208I and the third ornamental symbol display device 208J. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e8) to (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotate 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e11-1), the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that fluctuated and fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e11-2), the display of digesting the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, even if the notice icon is digested, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e12-2), an effect display is performed in which the princess character dances with a fan and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, re-variable display is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "decoration symbol combination) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 50 (e7 ′) shows an example in which, after the display shown in FIG. 50 (e6) is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in directions away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the character of the heel is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed across the third ornament symbol display device 208J, the first ornament symbol display device 208H, and the second ornament symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 50 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate together, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also rotates. It is also possible to rotate together. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be configured integrally. It may be configured as a body and driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be able to be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and unlike FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third The display can be performed with the horizontal widths of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J being uniform.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing step by step another modification of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. 51, the transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side edges of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 51, the first layer panel disposed on the front side is subjected to lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is disposed on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is subjected to lens cuts in a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 51, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. In addition, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured with one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. In FIG. 51, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. In FIG. 51, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the purpose of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h 0 and hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Since the contents displayed in the chamber lettuce display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. That is, in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (extinguishes), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be terminated after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. While the state of moving toward the screen is displayed, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be made to be.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 performs dark display and guides the light. Stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise and causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layers may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, so that It is foretelling that the rendition will be executed.

  FIG. 51G shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 51 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 51 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the notice effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state in advance of notice. As shown in FIG. 51 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of symbols is performed in the chunklet display area 287 displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6. That the notice icon I6 is derived.

  FIG. 51 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel is also caused to emit light to simulate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel is different from the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel, the pattern formed on the first layer panel and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 51 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The enlarged display is performed on the entire screen, and at the timing, the notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon digestion effect. 52 (1) to FIG. 11 (11), except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink instead of the notice icon I10 for the fan. 22 (44) to FIG. 22 (54), only the portions different from the description described above with reference to FIG. 22 will be described in detail, and descriptions of common portions will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the contents of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. This drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 52 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and an effect display for sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is in a state before the operation reception start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (17), the button reception time meter decreases in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 52 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. Note that the timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. May be the timing before is displayed, or may be the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. Further, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, when it is turned on (for example, lit in blue) to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period, You may make it light (for example, light in red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an effect example using movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  53 (a1) to FIG. 53 (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. Yes. FIG. 53 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 41 (1), but the effect movable body 224C simulating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” attached to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect device. It arrange | positions so that it may be hidden behind 206.

  FIG. 53 (a2) shows a state where the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden in the effect device 206 to a viewable position that is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, it is notified that one of a plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be notified by voice or lamp. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the types of notice icons, and the types of notice icons stocked depending on the types of effect movable bodies 224C that appear may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (a3) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 53B, effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can rotate about the depth direction as the rotation axis are arranged in the vicinity of the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first effect movable body 224Da marked with “Large”, a fifth effect movable body 224De marked with an asterisk symbol, “board” The second effect movable body 224Db to which the character is attached is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a “dance” character are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These first effect movable body 224Da to sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 53B, when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the number of effect movable bodies that have been digested may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the stocked notice icons may be rotated. Also good.

  FIGS. 53 (c1) to (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the pre-reading mode has been entered. In this production example, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the state shifts to a pre-reading mode for notifying that the change display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 53 (c1) shows that the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the upper arm portion 224a is pivotally attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character display “Preparing for special training” on the right side in the belt-like scroll display area. Scrolls from left to right. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position) A reciprocating operation (prefetching operation) is performed. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. In addition, during the pre-reading operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 53 (c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by arranging two “decorations 1” during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the object of prefetching. Here, the prefetching operation is continued.

  FIG. 53 (c4) shows a state in which the special training reach as the super reach production is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “Preparing for special training” is ended, and the character display of “Special training start” indicating that the special training reach is started is performed. Further, after the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 53 (c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (c6). Further, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image and notifies that the reliability for the big hit is high.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. It is. In FIG. 54, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 54, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode.

  Since FIG. 54 (1) is the same display as FIG. 41 (1) described above, detailed description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  In this example of production, Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (3), but the hat notification icon I6 possessed by the hat has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 54 (4). As shown in FIG. 5, in the state where the character YM of Tono-sama is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 54 (5), the hold symbol h11, h12 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Note that Tono-sama character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (6), an effect display is performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this production example, when the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notification icon is stocked. The notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed while the symbol fluctuation display is being executed, but a so-called gasse warning is not performed. May be. In this case, for example, the character YM of Tono-sama may end the display before the start of the variation display of the symbol that is the target of prefetching. For example, the character YM may be displayed one time before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of Tonosama may be terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching ends. For example, super reach that is performed during the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started. The display of Tono-sama character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of Tonosama may be continuously displayed after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character's character is waiting and the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swing fluctuation display is in progress), the standby display may be continued in a state where the character has the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same except that (12) and the variation display of the second decorative symbol are performed, detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 54 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Yes. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 54 (12), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 54 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 55, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 55, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  55 (a1) to 55 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after an effect for notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 55 (a1) shows a state in which the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a character display of “item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is acquired in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bowling effect by the Tono-sama character has been started. Note that the mission displayed on the explanation display unit 288 and the content of the success reward are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the pre-read advance notice, It may be related to a notice about the symbol variation display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that a notice of notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing a bowling effect as shown in FIG. 55 (a1). This bowling effect may be a dedicated effect that is performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the currently changing symbol display, or may be used as another pre-reading advance notice. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed indicating that it is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. It should be noted that the “Strike and Item Get” is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates the mission and its success fee.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball cast by the Tono-sama character rolls on the lane and moves toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , The expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image of the striked scene is displayed together with the text display of “strike”, and the mission is achieved. As shown in the figure, a character display of “GET” is displayed together with the enlarged hat notice icon I6 to notify that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is informed that it has been stocked. In this way, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, during the symbol variation display being executed, the announcement item is not displayed (stock), and the announcement item is displayed. A notice is being made.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, the notice icon display area 285C for displaying the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-described bowling effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit is made during the bowling production, the bowling production is started at the timing of displaying the big jackpot symbol derived after super reach (for example, during fluctuation fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (b), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. . In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55 (c), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modification of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, description has been given of the one that preferentially displays the fluctuation of the special figure 2 over the special figure 1. However, in this production example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. However, the special figure variation game for holding each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the one that performs the start opening prize order variation for starting the start opening prize order. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to those that perform special figure 2 priority fluctuation. 56, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 56, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. In addition, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed on the first special figure starting port 230. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and put on hold, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been put on the second special figure starting port 232 and put on hold. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2. FIG.

  The effect shown in FIG. 56 is an effect that may start after the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, and the SB character SB moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, This is an effect (Amida effect) for obtaining a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Amida effect is started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), a savohani character SB is placed at any one of the starting points of three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Are arranged at each of the end points of the three horizontal lines, respectively, a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lose icon IX. In addition, several vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central part of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of holds at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited thereto. In this Amida production, if the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the rules of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. When the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that every time a pseudo-ream is performed, the Sabohani character SB may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the character moves up to the next vertical line. May be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the place of the vertical line of 2 or more points | pieces per symbol change display. 56, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 55C and 55D, the effect can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the AMIDA effect even during execution of super reach. Then, for example, there may be an effect that the notice icon increases during super reach.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative symbol starts to be changed. Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB starts moving from the starting point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is displayed. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are displayed connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. In the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the middle horizontal line is reached halfway.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is found to be cut off in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line, so the Sabohani character SB is in the middle Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that it has been acquired, the AMIDA effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons is selected. For example, FIG. 56 (a1- 2) As shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is arranged at all the horizontal line end points, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3). Also good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is determined that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is a warning icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed as described above. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. The effect as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), without disposing the losing icon IX, disposing the hat's notice icon I6, the fan's notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 at the end of each horizontal line, It may be determined that any notice icon is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the production of Amid with confidence.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), the savohani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the warning icons (hat warning icon I6, fan warning icon I10) arranged at the end of each horizontal line. In addition, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand car boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is ensured that an effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed is performed, so that the player hits the big hit. In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-6), the notification icons of the patrons who do not clearly know the type of the warning icon at the end of each horizontal line (the first icon of the first icon I1, the second icon of the warning icon I2, the first icon 3 notice icons I3) may be arranged, so that the player does not know what notice icons will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, the expectation can be improved. Further, as described above, the color of the notice icon of Tono-sama varies depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the changed notice icon from the lord's notice icon depending on which color of the notice icon is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is a notice icon for the red lord, is more likely to be changed to a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is fixed than a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is not fixed, The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon, can be easily changed to a notice icon in which the “pseudo-ream” is not fixed.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is concealed with smoke to make it difficult to specify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be concealed with smoke, and the progress route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida production is started. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the production in peace. Furthermore, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line where the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the AMIDA effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2), during execution of the AMIDA effect, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line is hidden with smoke, and then, FIG. 56 (a2-2a) is displayed. ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2a), the loss icon IX is changed to a thousand box notice icon I9, and the content of the Amida effect is promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons arranged at the end points of each horizontal line are changed to the lose icon IX or the notice icon with a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida effect are demoted. It may be.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the central part of the vertical line is hidden with smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. For example, FIG. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida effect, the smoke that has partially hidden the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, the possibility of acquiring either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 has been suggested. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the second vertical line is cut in the middle, so that the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in 56 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut. Therefore, after the losing icon IX is selected and the AMIDA effect ends, FIG. 56 (a4-3a) As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  Note that, in the above-mentioned AMIDA effect, a pre-reading notice about the symbol variation display that is a pre-reading target may be performed according to the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. is there. In FIG. 57, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 57, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, and the hold display becomes a prefetch notice display mode (savohani hold icon). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (1), the above-described notice icon display region 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 57 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 57 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 accordingly displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 57 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (2), the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Displayed and notified that the number of holds is three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of savohani) instead of the default display mode.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the icon h11, and becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 57 (5) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. As described above, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain Tono-sama production has started.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 57 (11) to (12), a display in which the character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the moving animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable symbol display is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (15), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the movement animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 57 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. Thus, according to this production example, it can be said that the prefetching notice with the hold icon is simultaneously performed together with the prefetching notice with the notice icon.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in stages, and in stages, other examples of an effect of increasing the notice icon and the effect of digestion FIG. In FIG. 58, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 58, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a pre-reading symbol variation display hold, but the display mode is For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  58 (a1) to FIG. 58 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is provided to notify in advance that a notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display of the deviation is displayed. The result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  After that, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the display is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is performed. The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1, and the third hold icon h13 The on-hold icon at the display position becomes the second on-hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol change display to be started next. Specifically, this placard PL1 is displayed with a hat notice icon I6 following “with the next change”, and further followed by “ga stock”, and the hat notice icon I6 Is informed that it will be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a Ton-like effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. As shown in 58 (a 3-1), the hat notice icon I 6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described effect example, the placard PL1 is displayed so that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed after “At the next change”, and further followed by “is stock”, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat notice icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol change display, no effects relating to the stock of the notice icon are performed as shown in FIG. 58 (a3-2). An effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, Tono-sama effect) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gassestock effect that does not stock the notice icon is performed.

  58 (b1) to FIG. 58 (b3) show a state in which a prefetching mode, which is one of the prefetching notices, is performed during the symbol variation display being executed at the time when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), a game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is put on hold, and a prefetch notice is made as a display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special graphic 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a prefetching mode that is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “Intense heat is approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Display to be performed.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (b3), during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. Tono-sama performance is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Thus, according to this production example, it is possible to perform a prefetching notice by changing the background display in addition to a prefetching notice by the stock of the notice icon and a prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 (c1) to (c2), a ton-like effect or the like is performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, and a notice icon May be stocked.

  58 (d1) to 58 (d3) show how the notice icon stock and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, it is configured to be able to execute the stock and digestion of the notice icon related to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (d1), when the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a notice icon as shown in FIG. 58 (d2). The notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285 is temporarily stocked. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (e1) to (e2), the hat notice icon I6 is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it do.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows different notice icon increase effects and digestion effects applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 59, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 59, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIGS. 59 (a1) to (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are used together.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “Castle Town”. Yes. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice and the description of the appearance character may be displayed, or the notice display may be performed. Also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned Tono-sama effect is performed, and a hat notification icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the character display of “stock” is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (b1) to (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the hat notice icon I6 that appears due to Tono-sama production is not stocked. You may make it digest. Thereby, the digest effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol variation display can be performed.

  FIGS. 59 (c1) to (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display region 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display region is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2 respectively display a hat notice icon I6, and the notice icon third display area YAL3 has a shuriken notice icon I7. It is displayed. Also, the second notice icon display area 285F has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. In other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, a smaller number than this. The reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on whether the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F. Well, for example, the more stock the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two of them may be digested. In this case, The remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display or may be deleted without being digested. In addition, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability for the big hit differs depending on the number of the notice items being stocked.

  FIGS. 59 (d1) to (d3) show other examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is the first hold. The icon h11 is overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a notice icon is included and displayed in the hold icon is shown.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (d2), the reduced-size hat notice icon I6s displayed on the variation icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and a character display of “stock” is added, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this production example, every time the symbol fluctuation display is suspended, the production of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. It is not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the fluctuation icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  59 (f1) to FIG. 59 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  59 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 59 (d1) and will not be described in detail.

  In this effect example, after that, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f2), and then the variation icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (f3). Although h0 is erased, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also erased together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. Thus, even if the notice icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  59 (g1) to FIG. 59 (g3) show a state where when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained that provides the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plurality of kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 18B, and which notice icon is included. It is a difficult aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then displayed in an enlarged manner. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (g3), the display of the notification icon I51 of the bouquet changes to a notification icon I6 of the hat and a notification icon I8 of the ribbon, and the types of the notification icons included in the notification icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to which type of the notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiment described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be displayed after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display is suspended. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, or if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and the symbol change display is not held, the stock status is displayed even during the demonstration display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked regardless of whether the symbol variation display is suspended.

  Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the stocked notice icon is changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, a stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to a fan notice icon I10. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of chances in a state where the hat's notice icon I6 is stocked, an effect may be performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 is changed to the thousand box notice icon I9. . Conversely, the stock notice icon may be demoted (level down).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the fan notice icon, or the hat notice icon I6 may be digested and executed to increase the number of pseudo reams. Good. Conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed may be the same or different between the symbol change display that is a big hit and the symbol change display that is lost.

  Further, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to carry out the advance notice of stocking the notice icon.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the length of fluctuation time for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be digested during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  Further, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 before interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stocked and not digested, or may be configured to digest.

  In addition, the types of notification icons are not limited to those described above or described later, and various types can be employed.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player selects You may make it possible to increase possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  In addition, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is digested, for example, the user setting may be cleared, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  In addition, for example, an effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is digested, for example, the prefetch mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after confirming the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Further, for example, a point acquisition item or a level-up gifting item may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. It may be.

  Further, for example, a reach production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the Tono-sama icon is digested, Tono-sama VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Also, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, an icon “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune telling icon) that starts fortune-telling when digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  In addition, for example, there may be an icon for displaying information on the island simultaneous production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production starts may be displayed, or the contents of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that allows for store-side customization once digested. For example, it is possible to make settings that allow the production to be performed according to the area of the installed amusement store (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) and the name of the amusement store to be installed Good. For example, according to the setting, it is possible to differentiate between a group notice character (for example, Namahage group) appearing in the Tohoku region mode and a group notice character (eg, Shachihoko group) appearing in the Chubu region mode. There is a case.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed is displayed, or a result indicating that the symbol change display is notified is displayed.

  Moreover, for example, when digested, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state.

  Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing, in stages, examples of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. It is.

  60 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the common figure display apparatus 210, the common figure reservation lamp 216, and the 4th symbol display apparatus 284a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of FIG. 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of FIG. 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 60 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both FIG. 1 and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A in FIG. 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icons are displayed left justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed or not as necessary.

  FIG. 60B shows a state in which two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side aligned. These hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, since the first hold is consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left side as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of FIG. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 60 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. ).

  After the change of the display mode of the hold icon h11, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (e) is reached, the notice icon display area 285A and the princess notice icon Ih are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. The That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has been increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by a balloon with the character notation “Atari” and “Question Mark” appears. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), after “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, so the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. The In the present embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, if the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is out of sync, a notice icon Will not be digested, and no notice icon will be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digest icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the preview icon is digested and increased. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of FIG. Only the region 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of place. .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (j), after the suspended symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started, Tonen's notice icon It is digested, and “Atari” and “Question Mark” Tono-sama character YI appears with a letter balloon. Note that the appearance timing of Tono-sama character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 60 (j), a bad servant notice icon Id is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil agent is added and displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the Tono-sama notice icon It may be, or at the same time. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the appearance of the villain character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 60 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , You will be informed that it was a big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to perform the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 hold, An increase display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of / 50, an increase display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, and an increase display of the notice icon of the bad actor is executed with a probability of 2/50 . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tono-sama is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 25/50. Execute the digest display. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of place, when the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is suspended as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. Will display an increase in the notification icon of Tono-sama with a probability of 3/50, an increase display of the notification icon of the princess with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notification icon of the bad actor with a probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, digestion display of Tonen's notice icon is executed at a probability of 1/50, digestion display of a princess's notice icon is executed at a probability of 10/50, and a notice icon of an evil agent is executed at a probability of 15/50 Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display in FIG. , 25/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the princess, 20/50 probability to increase the number of the princess notice icon, 7/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the evil agent Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not assumed to win the second special figure starting port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, The notice icon may not be displayed in an increased manner and any notice icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of place, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 on hold. Do not perform and do not display any notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the electric support state is finished and one or a plurality of suspensions remain for the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, an increase display and a digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result that is executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73.

  62 to 73 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 62 to 73, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 62 to 73 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 62 to 73, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 62 to 72 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a mode of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is the castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62D starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character displays an icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It shows how to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance when the Tono-sama character throws it. It should be noted that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or impossible. In this case, it may be specified from the middle of throwing, or may be specified from the beginning. Also, an animation related to a notice icon (high expectation notice icon) with a high jackpot expectation when digested and an animation related to a notice icon with a low jackpot expectation when digested than the high expectation notice animation. The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (f), a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown a bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “By digesting the notice icon ...”, something has been done by digesting the notice icon An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to. Thus, in the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where a plurality of types of explanation displays are displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (i). . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for notifying that the swordsman reach will shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one-to-one to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 62 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the Tono-sama character. The animation ends. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Here, the difficulty in visual recognition means that the visual recognition icon is more difficult to see than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1. In other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, thereby making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display part TT1 and the notice of the swordsman notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The arrangement position of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and in this way the same effect can be obtained. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 or may be the content that is completely unrelated to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be content related to the current performance, or content that is completely unrelated to the current performance. In FIG. 62 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon and is related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It is not displayed in relation to the text, but happens to be related to the contents of the explanation, but the content of the text displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched as described later. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be digested in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. In this example, the description has been given of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display part TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display part ST1.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (l), the first decorative design display device 208L has a decorative design of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Panda is the master of the lord”. The relationship between the Tono-sama character and the panda character is described. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the display change of the tutorial display portion TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display portion TT1 displays a plurality of explanations in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 62 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is completed. In other words, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “When the Yatsushiro general moves ...”. It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb operate.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the display position. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (p), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging, and the expectation about whether or not the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested is expressed. By doing so, the player may be anxious to want the notice icon to be used early. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. The effect display need not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon I62 of the swinging swordsman moves upward and is being digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. Thereby, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a) following FIG. 62 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display for notifying that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advancement to the swordsman reach is foretold by digesting the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which produces high reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows a situation where the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 63 (c), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be out of frame after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be out of frame with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation display is made, the UI may be out of frame after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 63 (d), the duel scene animation continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 63 (e) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifying that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the main character, Tosama, was defeated by the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 63 (i), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. A combination of decorative symbols is derived and fluctuation fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) for reviving after stock display is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town that is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. 64 (a) to (l) are the same as FIGS. 62 (a) to (l), and the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 64 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as “decoration C”) displayed as “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed as “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration”. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance up notice icon I63 may always be stocked, or the chance up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. The notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the chance-up notice icon I63 (including an enlarged / reduced image itself), which may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the animation for obtaining a notice icon with a symbol may be anything that can display the notice icon in an identifiable manner. Further, there may be an incompatible icon such as the notice icon symbol CS and the chance up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be more or less than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of notice icon displayed when an animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to Tonosama's character is displayed as an advance notice when triggered by an animation relating to a figure (eg, an animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed on two occasions, and two may be stocked on different occasions with one change, or may not be displayed. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in any symbol row. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “When a general Yatsushiro moves ...”.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 64 (n), a chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and moves to the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 and is arranged (stocked). Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance up notice icon I63 is stocked. In addition, at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon symbol 63 of the chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but it may be notified by voice. Thus, in this effect example, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of notice icons. Moreover, according to this production example, it is comprised so that a stock notice icon can be stocked. Also, in this example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked differently, and therefore the contents of the production until the stock is different are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is displayed. Is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 64 (q), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the display position. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) following FIG. 64 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of “decoration 2” are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It may also be noticed that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display, so that it may be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display part TT1. Further, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman notice icon I62 to make the swordsman notice icon I62 stand out. FIG. As shown, this effect display is applied to the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance up notice icon I63, and there are cases where attention can be drawn to the explanation display and the chance up notice icon I63.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that the swordsman reach has been developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance up notice icon I63 that has not been digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance up notice icon I63 is displayed. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. Yes. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, depending on the position that the player sees, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, The chance-up notice icon I63 may be easily visible.

  FIG. 65 (f) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (f), a state where the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance advance notice icon I63 is not affected by this, and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 65 (g), duel animation continues, and when the timing shown in FIG. 65 (h) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and is expecting whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the state that the swinging up chance-up notice icon I63 is moved upward and is digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of Tono-sama is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first cut-in image. It has been reported that the degree of reliability for has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the chance up notice icon I63. The first cut-in image may be erased when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. May be. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed and another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may be overlapped with the notice icon stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon stored. In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the performance corresponding to the notice icon is started. Alternatively, it may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or may be a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display part TT1 when the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display part TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, the stock notice icon has a predetermined display area and may overlap with other images at certain moments, but may not overlap with other images at certain moments. Can do. If the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 65 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It does not have to disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 65 (n), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived and the fluctuation of shaking starts.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 66, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to perform an effect display that conveys the displayed notice icon to the stock position. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR as will be described later. Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. There may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a3), the bomb icon I6 popping out from the treasure chest image TR is ruptured. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to inform the user that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 66 (a6) shows a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the swordsman notice icon I62 is completely transferred from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (b1) to FIG. 66 (b8), another example of the notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display part TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “Swordsman is Tonentsu's nemesis” is displayed as an explanation display. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure chest image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure chest image TR. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 jumps upward from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out from the treasure box image TR is changed to the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that fact, and notifies that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. Note that the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be a timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may become.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing shown in FIG. 66 (b6) shows a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is resolved, and the player The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size while being overlapped with the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In this example, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5 ′), the height of the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the display position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is displayed in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Because the slide moves, the third decorative symbol display while visually confirming the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by location 208N.

  66, in the case where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, in the effect example shown in FIG. 66, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be displayed so that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlap state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 67, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame in normal times, and shows a state in which the tutorial is displayed from below when explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 67 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in of the tutorial display section TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a4), “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display section TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display section TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 67 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative design is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or may be deleted when the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or is out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a7), for example, after the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (e) to (j), FIG. 67 (a8) As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, in FIG. 67 (a10). The tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps the swordsman notice icon I62.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a11), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays an explanation message “Due to digestion of notice icon ...”, but the tutorial display part TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman notice icon I62 The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. If the display of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is out of frame, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state with the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. 67 (b1) to (b2) are as described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (p) to (q), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 shows a state in which the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation effect of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), “Tono is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the princess Chibi character CH1. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation indicating that “gold is hotter than red”, and a description regarding the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon part TT2 may overlap the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. In addition, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon part TT2 or a balloon part TT3 described later. Also, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloons TT2 and TT3 may have the same font or different fonts. The balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may be overlapped. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 and the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may be display regions partitioned by lines, or may be display regions where either one or both are not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the Chibi princess character CH. In addition, the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon part TT2 may also be configured to be able to display across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. In the tutorial display part TT1, “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. Also, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation indicating “the swordsman reach is hot”, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach. Note that the timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or is the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the state that the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the balloon section TT3 is displayed with an explanation “when a panda is intruded”, and an explanation regarding the notice effect is made. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative design, but may be disposed at a position where it does not overlap. Note that the timing at which the balloon TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing when the character of Tono-sama throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to easily draw attention to the player on the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3. It may be a timing before the timing, or may be a timing after the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be positioned on the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap a plurality of display parts (tutorial display part TT1 and balloon part TT3) on which explanation display is performed.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 68 (a1) to (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the production is displayed on the balloons (balloon part TT2 and balloon part TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the display mode of the balloon part TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon part TT2 is changed to red), and the character “Intense heat” is changed. In some cases, a notice display or a pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  68 (c1) to 68 (c3) show other examples of contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tonosama” to “Developed as a swordsman reach”. Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 68 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 to red) and displaying the characters “Intense heat”, a notice display or a pre-read notice display may be performed in the symbol variation display. Also good.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. In FIG. 69, the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display part TT4, and the stage name display part ST2 are integrally displayed. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 69 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a2), the third hold icon (third hold icon h13 in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and, as shown in FIG. 69 (a4), a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to (k) and described above.

  In FIG. 69 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character ruptures, the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured changes to the princess's notice icon I64 and moves to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced in size. In the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a5), the stage name display portion ST2 is overlapped but the state where the predetermined display position (stock position) has not been reached is shown. . In this case, since the princess's notice icon I64 is not yet displayed in the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least a part of the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. In the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 64), the explanation display is erased before it overlaps the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display is based on the trigger for obtaining the notice icon. You may comprise so that the timing which deletes may differ. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of a gas pattern, In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be deleted when the bomb icon I61 is overlaid on the stage name display unit ST2. At the time of this darkening effect, if the UI part is not displayed, at least a part from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gusset is executed while the darkening effect is being executed Specifically, the darkening effect is produced after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started. When the darkening effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the explanation display state). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (a6), when the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed up to now is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of “STAGE” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. The scene where the notice icon is digested may be configured to overlap the execution of the darkening effect described above. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or at least a part of the already acquired notification icons (such as at least one of the plurality of notification icons, or a part of one notification icon). May be. Further, the moving means performs an effect of moving at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the moving means. Also good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 69 (a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display section ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (description display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a9), first, the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and then the tutorial display section. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this example, for example, when the notice icons are digested sequentially from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the notice icon to be digested may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 69 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 move to the left one by one to display the tutorial. The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side by one. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by, for example, instantaneous movement.

  When all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In this case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the stage name display need not be resumed. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as that of the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, resumed after super-reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the kind of notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the kind of notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, may be shorter than the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked on the stage name display part ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is displayed in the tutorial display part. Although it is possible to stock up to three more in TT4, when the number of stocks is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. Up to two stocks may be configured.

  Also, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4. In the state), the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon is completely accommodated in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon starts to be moved upward, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 and the tutorial display section TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when digesting the notice icon. It may not be done.

  Further, in this effect example, the above-described example shown in FIG. 62 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it is needless to say that the modes shown in other drawings can be combined.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons need not be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a tooth-like manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to be filled in empty places. Good or not moving.

  In addition, each starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning port and a second special figure winning port, and so-called MAX8 machines (8 In some cases, the reservation icon display area is prepared in advance with four hold areas, and when there are four hold areas, the display area expands to five. Or you may enlarge up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  69 (b1) to FIG. 69 (b2) show a state where the stock notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward as shown in FIG. 68 (b2). In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display part ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display is provided. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display section TT4. Note that the display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another example of effects according to the present embodiment step by step.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  FIGS. 70A1 to 70A3 illustrate how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 70 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. In addition, about the display mode of this castle town stage, since it is the same as the mode shown by Fig.62 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 70 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that a UI part is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, the UI part in the space stage is displayed with a variation icon display area arranged at the lower center of the display screen, the variation icon h0 being placed on the pedestal, and a hold icon displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. In addition, the display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage described above with reference to FIG. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, The white pentagon display mode, and the pre-read notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagon display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. It has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon is different from the display position of the tutorial display area TT1, so that the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 70 (a3) shows a state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. An explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is not displayed in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when a transition is made to another stage (for example, the space stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  FIGS. 70 (b1) to (b2) show how the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and “Indicate the notice icon ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon for informing in advance the number of times that an effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated. It can be said that the reliability for the big hit is high, that is, the larger the number of stocks of the button icons IBT, the easier the big hit.

  Thus, according to this production example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that other display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 shows another production example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned Tono-sama character.

  71 (a1) to (a6) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Toshi-sama is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1). Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a1), a hatena notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens when digested. It may function as a notice icon. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a3), a state in which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the warning icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the Hatena notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 is difficult to view. Note that the size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the Hatena notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is deleted, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a6), what was displayed as “with the notice icon digestion ...” has been changed to “swordsman is the enemy of the lord”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. May be the previous timing, or may be a timing later than the timing when the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show how the notice icons already stocked are changed by the throwing animation. 71 (b1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), and FIG. 71 (b3) is the same as FIG. 71 (a6). Therefore, description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display area TT1 in FIG. 71 (b3), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display portion TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 71 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 71 (c1) to FIG. 71 (c3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. 71 (c1) is the same as FIG. 71 (b1), and FIG. 71 (c2) is the same as FIG. 71 (b2). Therefore, description of these drawings is omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 ruptures at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c2), as shown in FIG. 71 (c3), the effect image of the bombed icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 becomes the swordsman's notice. The icon changes to an icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stock advance notice icon and stocking the new advance notice icon.

  71 (d1) to (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (d1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 71 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character is displayed on the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (d3), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured is deleted, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red). )doing. Then, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 71, at least a part of the animation at the time of obtaining the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device) The same is true for animations performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a7) show a state in which the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying the fact that a specific notice icon has been stocked. 72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a3) are the same as FIG. 62 (h) to FIG. 62 (j), and description thereof will be omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 72 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends as shown in FIG. 72 (a4). As shown in FIG. 72 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 serving as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays “swordsman stock” indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. In other words, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 displays that fact to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who predicts that an effect with an extremely high expectation level for the big hit will be performed. Also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be before the end of the throwing animation, or after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, the achievement display unit KM1 may be noticed in some cases. Note that the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed in an overlapping manner on the achievement display unit KM1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 1-decoration C—decoration” is displayed. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a6) to (a7), a notice icon I63 indicating a chance up is displayed from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making it difficult to see at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1.

  In this production example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the kind of the notice icon to be digested. You may make it eliminate the overlap to. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and the notice icons are digested, the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at a predetermined interval. When the predetermined number of notice icons is consumed, the overlap of the notice icon with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 72 (b1) to FIG. 72 (b3), for example, examples of the operation modes of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate when developing to a super reach or a big hit are shown. It is shown.

  FIG. 72 (b1) shows a state where super reach is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a variation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit is out-of-frame at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen, and the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed. The 4th symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, there is a case where the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjacent to each other are integrated along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. The variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed at the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a rectangular shape. An image with the characters “celebration” in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and the fourth symbol of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the family crest member 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward to over the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Wrapped and the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest character 224E. According to this, there is a case in which the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden.

  72 (c1) to FIG. 72 (c4), the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a certain period on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed to change the effect button 136. A state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 72 (c1) shows a state in which a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach. FIG. 72 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 63 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M at all times or at least for a certain period. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 72 (c2), the duel scene animation continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies the player that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c3), as shown in FIG. 72 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “I will go” A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 72 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 A panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the advance notice icon I67 for holding promotion is an icon for notifying that the display form of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display form with higher reliability for the big hit when digested. The pseudo-continuous notice icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative symbol when digested. In addition, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the look-ahead zone is made upon digestion. In addition, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon that, when digested, gives an announcement that a panda will intrude and that it will be a big hit (definite).

  FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIGS. 73 (a1) to (a7) show a state in which an explanation display (for example, a display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. In addition, the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 73 is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman on the left side.

  FIG. 73 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a3), only the “swordsman is Tono-sama” portion is scrolled in. Yes. In these cases, since no character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognized.

  Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a4) is reached, the entire character “Swordsman is Tonen-sama's nemesis” is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of “swordsman” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a5), the “Swordsman is” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display area TT1, and the “I am the enemy of Tono-sama” part is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of “Tono-sama” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a6), the “Swordsman is Tono-sama” part is scrolled out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the “Is the enemy” part is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character part of “At the enemy” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display is finished. Thus, in this effect example, the character overlapped by the notice icon changes over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. Note that when the scrolling of the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b7) show another display in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which the display (for example, a notice display of “extreme heat”) is performed is shown. 73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b3) and FIG. 73 (b6) to FIG. 73 (b7) are respectively the same as FIG. 73 (a1) to FIG. 73 (a3) and FIG. 73 (a6) to FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 73 (b3), as shown in FIGS. 73 (b4) to 73 (b5), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the notice. For the advance notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red, and the letters “Intense heat” are displayed, thereby performing the advance notice display and the pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display. The scrolling display of the explanation display is interrupted during the preview display. For example, the above-described notice display may overlap the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes as shown in FIG. 73 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period in which the notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b7) is reached, the scrolling display of the explanation display ends. Note that the explanation display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, but the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  FIG. 73 (c1) to FIG. 73 (c5) are explanatory displays (for example, “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in a state where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are consumed.

  In FIG. 73 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63 which is a notice icon scheduled to be digested first and a swordsman notice icon I62 which is a second notice icon scheduled to be digested are a chance-up notice icon I63. The swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of the tutorial display portion TT1 on the left side. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (c2), when the chance up notice icon I63 is digested, the swordsman notice icon I62 is up as shown in FIGS. 73 (c3) to (c5). The notice icon moving animation for moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed is performed. Thus, after the overlap range of the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easily visible. There is a case. That is, in this effect example, depending on the number of stocked notice icons, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display part TT1. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, the notice icon moving display in the notice icon moving animation may overlap the explanation display scroll display.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
A notice means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of notices ,
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means [for example, the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area in FIG. 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.]
The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol fluctuation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, in the on-hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed. ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is the first number [for example, two, etc. The second number larger than the first number [for example, 3 etc.] is digested more easily than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be executable in addition to a plurality of kinds of notices. The notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice is likely to be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to expect the number of notices displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the game can be played so that the player does not miss the notice display. There is a case that can be made.

  Here, only the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed may be displayed as the notice icon, or other than the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed, or if the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed is not displayed. There may be.

In addition, “the notice means may provide a fake notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.] that is the same as the aspect of the notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect or the like that is a big hit]]. A viable means,
The notice means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area has been digested, Is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a pseudo-announcement that leads to a loss or a reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice having the same form as the notice form, or may be capable of executing anything other than the fake notice having the same form as the notice form. May be. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form, or may not execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form.

  The notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In addition, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it may be possible to execute anything other than the fake notice of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon. . The notice means may always execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the design variation display result may be out of sync, or after the fake notice is executed, the design change display result may be a big hit. There may be.

  In addition, after a false notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that is highly likely to display a jackpot symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than display according to the number of holds. Moreover, the hold display means may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the prefetch target to be displayed is executed. Displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is performed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon to be digested may be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, and therefore the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of displayable hold displays and the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the total displayable maximum number of hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 34 (49), etc.]
One of the plural types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be able to execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66), FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. [For example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. When the thousand car box notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed compared to when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be a big hit if you are
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice display. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed outside the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the kind of notice icon corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon can be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second display means always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a kind of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times of displaying the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested can be expected. You may be able to let

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, “the second display means may be a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is lost. Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or other than the fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. Can also be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is also possible that when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. There may be a case where when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is always out of place after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display that is highly likely to display the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, “the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are configured, or at least one of the image display means and the hold display means may not be configured.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. Also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may necessarily display a decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holds while visually recognizing the decoration symbol variation display.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of holdings may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, notifications other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may be possible. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may be a notification that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon to be digested may be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg, 4 or 8],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holds differs from the displayable number of notice icons, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the notice icon display.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds. Good.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than the total of the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds in the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 34 (49), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66), FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or digest even in normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or digest even during the execution of a special background mode for prefetching. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed, and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested when the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is not displayed, and the symbol “the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed” is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more easily displayed when the “symbol variation display with the notice display a” is performed than when the “variation display” is performed. The notice display b is a display that is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is easier to display the big hit symbol when the “symbol change display with the notice display b” is executed than when the “symbol change display with the notice display c” is executed. It may be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when the “symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested” is executed rather than the “symbol change display in which the notice icon C is digested” is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the “symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed, the jackpot symbol is more effective than the “symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed”. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may become easy.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the second number larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] [ For example, 3 etc.] is configured to be a big hit if digested,
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)]. It is a display means that can display the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a pre-read notice display before the start of “design variation display etc.”).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display means may include a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (9) to 20 (20), the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, during the period in which “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. A fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 19 (1) As shown in FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icon is completely digested until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “in the period in which the symbol variation display is performed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may start to be displayed. [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is displayed during the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542” Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [e.g., a thousand box notice icon I9 shown in FIG. 22 (47) or FIG. 33 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 29 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 34 (49), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold, which is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)], the notice icon In some cases, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.]
In some cases, the first notice icon that is displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 19 (9) to 20]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat that has started display at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (14), etc. ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)”) The first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display is sometimes digested [for example, FIG. 19 ( 9) to FIG. 20 (25), the hat notice icon I6 that has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is the symbol variation display that is the object of prefetching as shown in FIG. 20 (23). Digested in, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon that is started during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, as the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 19 (9) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20 (25), the symbol change which is the object of prefetching is such that the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. A hat stand icon I6 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of display, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a second number [e.g., three, etc.] than when the first number [e.g., one, etc.] of the first notice icon is digested during the display of the one time symbol variation display. ] Is more likely to be a big hit if the first notice icon is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, a first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIG. 21 (28) to FIG. May be displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.,
When the first notice icon [e.g. hat notice icon I6] is digested, a first fake notice table [e.g. false pseudo-relation effect etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. There is a case,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 18B, etc.]
A third notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8] can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started. [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, For example, the background is shifted to the prefetch mode)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 19 (1), a decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the first notice icon started during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (9). The notice icon I6 of the hat that has been displayed during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching Etc. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the symbol variation display based on
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
A symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , A notice icon I31 for "Tono", a notice icon I32 for "Princess", a notice icon I33 for "Tsubaki", etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 41 (1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 42, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon I21 and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32), a hat When the previous notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 22 (46) to (57), when the 1,000-box notice icon I9 is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May start, etc.]
The first combination of the displayed notice icons (for example, the combination of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 shown in FIG. 41, etc.) is a single symbol variation. By being digested in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image or the like displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 42 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the expectation that the first effect display may be displayed can be continued until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

  Also, according to this game stand, a plurality of notice icons can be displayed during the symbol variation display prior to the start of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where an effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Moreover, even if it is comprised so that only the 1st effect display may be displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed several notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. In addition, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is digested in a single symbol variation display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be. Moreover, even if it is comprised so that the 1st effect display may be necessarily displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed some notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by digesting the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display only when the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display. The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of the first number [eg, two, etc.] of the notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is performed after the first notice icon of the first combination of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons is consumed. May continue to have an expectation that it may be displayed.

“The first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a“ home ”notice icon I21, etc.] and a second notice icon [for example, a“ print ”notice icon I22, etc.]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (19), the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. During the period from when the symbol change display ends until the “house” notice icon I21 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 42 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested], etc. Stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who can see the game.

  Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed. In the symbol fluctuation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in a single symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested.

  Further, only in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 20 or the like shown in FIG. 20] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 6), the display of the head-length character BC displayed in correspondence with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variation of production may be increased and the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be digested, A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. Moreover, it may be configured such that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect is displayed by digesting the third notice icon. You may be comprised so that a display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third presentation icon may be configured to be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than digesting the third notice icon. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc. is not an icon indicating the number of the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]
Second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display that the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 46 (10) to FIG. 47 (13) digests, or FIG. 47 (16) to FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to (c5), or display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c5). Etc.] is a means capable of displaying,
The second display means displays the notification icon [for example, the notification icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to 47 (13) and the display of the notification icon shown in FIGS. 46 (5) to (9). A display of the notification icon I6 of the hat to be displayed, or a display etc. of the notification icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 49 (c6)],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 may function as a prefetch notice display],
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 49 (c1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c9), a notice icon is displayed during a period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there may be a case where a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the line of sight of the player who sees the display about the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means, It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may comprise only the first display means and the second display means, or may include a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display related to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 49 (c1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Also good.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. There is a case where a notice is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to (5), a notice that the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A (Mr. Production) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since there is a possibility that a notice icon may be displayed, there is a case where the player can be noticed on the display means so that the player does not miss the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only the notice for displaying the notice icon is displayed, or in the first display means, the notice for displaying that the notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where other displays are also performed. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where this is not done.

  In addition, there may be a case in which a notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. There may be a case where a notice is given to notify the user.

In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (4) and FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the range.

In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of kinds of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG.
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. 47 (16) to (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which 208 is displayed over the screen, and the number BC character pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is the second. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, the on-hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
First movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 52 (12), a family crest member 224B shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2), etc.]] ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 52, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon display area 285 includes two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31.]
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 52 (12) to (17)]. A viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31 etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the movable means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. There is a case.

  Further, according to this game table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be always executed. If the fourth notice icon is digested, the first movable effect may not be executed.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66) and FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are digested, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 or the notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable icon It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the first notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the fifth notice icon displayed. Even when the five notice icons are not digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 52 (12)] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 52 (17). It is an effect that changes to a projecting position etc.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the change of the operation means is notified by the notice icon, so that the operation means may be noted.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operation means, or may be movable other than the operation means. Further, the first movable means may necessarily move the operating means or may not move the operating means.

In addition, it includes “second movable means [for example, a family crest member shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
The second movable effect may be executed when a sixth notice icon [for example, notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested. ing,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes abundant, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the sixth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons, When the sixth notice icon is digested, the second movable effect may not be executed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon is displayed. Of these, the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 52 (the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, the notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.) Is not an icon indicating the number of operations for which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 54 (1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand car box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that display of the notice icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this game machine, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. In addition, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started, or other than the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestable. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 54 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished, the two hat announcement icons I6, the thousand box announcement icon I9 and the fan announcement icon displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are digested. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. Etc., a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by Tono-sama over the symbol change display of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and thus the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be a thing which may be. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 54 (2). ~ As shown in Fig. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by Tono-sama will be displayed ends before the symbol change display that is the target of prefetching is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be prefetched starts, so there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be prefetched.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation may be configured. During the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variation display that is displayed before is not being displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of the third number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 may be started. Etc.)
The third number is a number of 2 or more.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third icon There may be a case where the display may indicate other than the display of at least one of the number of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be started. There may be cases where it does not indicate that display of at least one of the cases may start.

In addition, the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. 56 (a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida production, the hat's notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. In addition, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display is surely started. There may be a case where display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 54 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2), etc.]] ”) Is suspended, the display of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 57 (4) to FIG. 13 (13)] ”). May start,
A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) are displayed in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is a big hit as a prefetch target is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the symbol variation display that is displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, the display of the notice icon can be enjoyed as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design fluctuation display to be prefetched from the displayed symbol fluctuation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. The notice icon may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as the first prefetch notice display.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is suspended after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started other than after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of one symbol variation display is started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the pre-reading target is displayed after the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Until the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the two hat notice icon I6, the thousand car box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, while the on-hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, the symbol variation display that is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. Also, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started until the second symbol variation display is terminated, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from the start of display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 57 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2)] is suspended, Display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 57 (2), etc.] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started even when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. Display of the hold display may be started. In addition, when the second symbol variation display is held, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail, and when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

In addition, as the second pre-reading notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second pre-reading display form [for example, the pre-reading notice display form (savohani display form) shown in FIG. 57 (2)]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode (savohani display mode) when the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is put on hold. Display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, variations of the pre-reading notice display increase and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display form, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in display modes other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display form, and as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is the second prefetch display. It may not be displayed in a mode.

  In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variation display that is displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspended display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

  In addition, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second pending display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetch notice display [for example, preproduction mode display shown in FIGS. 58 (b2) to (b3), etc.],
The third pre-reading notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b1) to FIG. 58 (b3). Thus, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading notice display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is put on hold, or the display is not started after the second symbol change display is put on hold. There may be cases.

In addition, the “symbol change display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol change display [for example, the symbol change that is lost based on the third hold that is the pre-read target shown in FIG. ")" Is suspended, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in Fig. 57 (4) to Fig. 13 (13)]". ) May start,
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may start [for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 (4) to 23 (66), the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching is suspended is started. By the time the symbol change display that causes a certain loss ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  In addition, only the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display is displayed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. Display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
When the notice icon is displayed, it is an icon displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 includes a swordsman notice icon I62. And a chance up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Also good. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display unit, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display unit.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be a thing. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4, No explanation is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed with the notice icon displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be always resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 66, etc.]
The third display means displays the display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66 (a2) to (a4) and the swordsman notices. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, and can display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69],
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed in the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the stage name display section ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. 2 pseudo-announce notice icons I65 are displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area in the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be one in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and not displayed, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the third display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned by a line in a square shape, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a7), The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69]. A display area different from a display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 has a chance to increase with the swordsman notice icon I62. The notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first icon is not displayed. No display other than the display may be displayed. In addition, the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the first icon is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. A display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. When all the notice icons are digested, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be cases. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, for example, when the first display is an explanation of the first character, a tenth display that is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

“One of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ Gold is hotter than red ”in the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), (A6), a character display of “swordsman reach is hot” in the balloon part TT2, a character display of “when panda intrudes” in the balloon part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 shown in FIG. 68 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case other than the second display area in the display means when displayed. It may also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

In addition, “the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4, the character display “swordsman reach is hot” is displayed on the balloon display part TT2, and “when panda intrudes” is displayed on the balloon display part TT3. Text display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in the state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. In addition, a notice display and an explanation display may be alternatively displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG. 69],
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  The fourth display may be capable of being displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area in the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state where the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may be a state where the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and not displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 66, etc.]
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. Is a means that can be displayed, etc.,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or can display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display linked with the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned by a line in a square shape, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a9) (the princess notice icon I64, the pseudo-announce notice icon I65, The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  Note that there may be a case where the number of holdings and the number of notice icons coincide.

  Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 to FIG. 143, other game machines to which the present invention can be applied (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines 100 and spinning game machines such as slot machines) will be described in detail. To do. 74 to 143 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 74 to 143 in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 143, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106 as a door body, and a door with a ball storage tray. 108, the launcher 110, and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, an effect button 136 as an example of operation means for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 76) by the player's operation, and an effect button 36, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 is provided with a lower pan full detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 as an example of an operation means is also provided, and the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other so that the player can operate with one hand. In the present embodiment, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a first operation means, and the effect button 136 may be referred to as a second operation means.

  Here, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 shows operation key unit 137 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the operation key unit 137 includes six buttons, that is, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, and a cancel button 137f. Each of these buttons is smaller than the production button 136, that is, the operation area is small. In other words, it can be said that the effect button 136 is larger in size than the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, and the cancel button 137f.

  The effect button 136 includes an operable position (first position) protruding from the top surface of the door 108 with a ball storage tray and a door with a ball storage tray by an effect button drive motor 434 (see FIG. 77) as an example of a drive unit. It is possible to displace between the operation impossible position (second position) that enters the inside from the upper surface of 108. The effect button 136 can be pressed by the player at the operable position, and cannot be pressed by the player at the inoperable position. The effect button 136 may be configured to vibrate when operated.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 74, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  75 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 74 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 77) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing relating to the above, and a power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 77) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines. In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 operates the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 to produce effects, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When winning, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 76 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is disposed on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 can be displaced between a position retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advance position). Yes.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 74, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 76 correspond to the effect means. The device 208 corresponds to an example of display means or decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means. Each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 includes a plurality of boards (for example, a plurality of control boards, one or more relay boards, and one or more control boards). It may be constituted by. Further, when the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is regarded as sub-control means, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and sub-control means (first sub-control) Unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) are provided on separate boards, and the boards are directly connected by electric signal lines, but the electric signals between these boards are further connected by another relay board. The transmission / reception may be relayed.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing Yes. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is designated is displayed in a table format. May refer to a summary. The same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). Lower body full sensor for detecting that the main body opening sensor, front frame door sensor, door sensor with ball storage tray, and lower tray 128 shown in FIG. A random number generation circuit that receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and compares an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage. 318, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a general-purpose display device Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 10 and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) Is connected to a drive circuit 330 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control unit that performs game control, and includes a success / failure determination unit, a start information prefetching unit, and a prior determination unit, which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined prize opening such as a general prize opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, a variable winning opening 234 or the like is won. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 included in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 may be provided in the power management unit 660.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an input / output interface for transmitting / receiving commands to / from the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication, the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 is the main control unit. A signal corresponding to a command can be transmitted to 300. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. In addition, information communication between the main control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured as one-way communication so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. 74, and an operation key unit. The basic circuit 402 receives detection signals from a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons constituting the button 137 and an effect button initial position sensor 427 as detection means for detecting that the effect button 136 is located at the initial position. Sensor circuit 428 for output, upper arm motor and forearm motor for driving the effect movable body 224, drive circuit 430 for controlling the family crest motor for driving the effect movable body 225, and effect button drive for driving the effect button 136 A drive circuit 432 for controlling the motor 434 is connected. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is set to the above-described operable position, but is not limited thereto, and can be set to an appropriate position. For example, the initial position is set to the above-described inoperable position. You may make it do.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

  Thus, the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 are functioning as an example of production control means.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 mainly based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and awards based on control signals output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. The payout control unit 600 may be connected to a frame sensor (not shown). The frame sensor detects when the front frame door 106 and / or the main body 104 is open, and outputs an open signal. Here, the payout control unit 600 may output door opening information to the main control unit 300 when an opening signal from the frame sensor is input.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. 74, or the ball feed for feeding the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 78A to 78D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 78 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 78 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 78A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 78 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 78 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 78 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 78 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long press automatic continuous hitting function for performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation by a long pressing operation of the effect button 136. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer, and the repeated operation is an effect button 136. This is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in the state in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, an interval of 100 ms) is performed in a pseudo manner while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136, the long press auto-strike function is performed by the effect button 136 in order to appropriately perform the single operation with the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electric support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 79 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 75 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms). The main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 77 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. 77. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 77 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 78 (c)) or the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 78 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability variation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability variation flag is also on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 82A to 82C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch results and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially shown. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Also, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 81, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 82A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure 1 variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (disconnection) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 82B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (b), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 82B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 82 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, FIG. 83 is referred to regarding the success / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination high probability table, and FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination low probability table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure is in a high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination shown in FIG. 2, if the special figure high probability state is set, the special determination low probability state shown in FIG. In that case, refer to the low probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 83C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of order, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 83 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 84A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 84B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (b), based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lot. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 85A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 85A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to. In the chance button control process according to the present embodiment, if there is a command for operating the effect button 136 in the effect data read in step S409 or the updated effect data, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. To do.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when the instruction data to the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 is included in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 430.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 85B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 85C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 86A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 86A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data by the shielding device 246) corresponding to this command is read from a ROM (not shown). Processing is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP (not shown) in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the VDP (details will be described later).

  In step S513 subsequent to step S511, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to a drive circuit (not shown) that drives the shielding device 246.

  In step S515 subsequent to step S513, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when the effect requested by the command of the first sub-control unit 400 is started or ended, a setting is made to output a control command for notifying the first sub-control unit 400 to that effect. Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 86B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, transmission of a control command to the first sub-control unit 400 set in the information transmission process (step S515) of the second sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 86D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM (not shown). As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the VDP attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP transfers image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM in step S551, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP. The VDP performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the VDP to start drawing an image. The VDP starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  87 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 87A is an example of a box data table, and FIG. 87B is an example of a part data table. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 stores the box data shown in FIG. 5A in the box of the RAM 408 at the timing of each effect execution, such as when the change starts, when the change is held, when the notice effect is generated, when the reach effect is generated, or when the button effect is generated. Set in the data setting area. The box data is part data (parts A to H as an example here) composed of information such as a liquid crystal command and sound, light emission, and an accessory (movable body) executed in response to an effect based on the liquid crystal command. Etc. The liquid crystal command is a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an effect display corresponding to each at the start of fluctuation, change on hold, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. 101, 102, 201-203, etc.).

  Further, the liquid crystal command is in accordance with the operation of the corresponding accessory M (production movable bodies 246, 224, 225) at the time of start of fluctuation, change of hold, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. For example, a command for box data such as No. 255.

  Specifically, in this example, no. The box data of 1 includes a liquid crystal command for starting a special figure change, a part A (data for storing a bumpy accessory), and a part B (data for storing a shutter). No. The box data 101 includes a liquid crystal command for displaying a saloon background and part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the saloon background). The box data 201 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 01 and part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (display of characters (殿) and “?”)). The box data 202 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 02, and parts E and F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02 (character (princess) and character display of “How are you?”)). , No. The box data 203 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 03, and parts E and G (production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03 (character (princess) and character display!)!) No. The box data of 255 includes a liquid crystal command for moving up and down the forceful combination and a part H (data for up and down movement of the forceful combination).

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the part data includes the movable mode of the actors (production movable bodies 246, 224, 225, etc.) executed corresponding to each production, the output sound (sound) from the speaker 120, This is information on the light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 and the like).

  That is, each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an accessory action layer having shutter device data and accessory (movable body) device data. Here, a plurality of (two) sound layers, ramp layers, and accessory action layers are provided, and the higher the number of each layer, the higher the priority. Each part data may have one layer number and may have one device data number (or type).

  More specifically, in this example, the part A (data for storing the bicep feature is returned) to the initial position of the feature (effect movable body 224) that is bounced on the feature action layer 1 (bumpy action layer). Contains device data. Part B (data for storing the shutter) includes device data for returning the shutter accessory (production movable body (shielding means) 246) to the initial position in the accessory operation layer 2 (shutter accessory operation layer). Yes.

  Part C (production data corresponding to the display of the salon background) includes sound device data which is BGM for the salon background in the sound layer 1 and lamp device data of the light emission pattern for the salon background in the lamp layer 1. Yes.

  In addition, the part E (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 01) includes the sound device data of the speech (such as “n?”) Generated by the character (dono) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2, and the lamp layer 2 It contains the lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice.

  In addition, the part F (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 02) includes the sound device data of the line ("Genki?") From the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the notice in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to is included.

  In addition, the part G (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03) is stored in the sound layer 2 in the sound device data of the line ("Gekiatsu!") Uttered by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice, and in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

  Part H (data for up and down movement of the bicep feature) includes lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding to the up and down movement of the bicep on the lamp layer 2 and a combination action layer 1 (bicep feature movement layer). ) Includes device data for moving up and down the accessory (production movable body 224).

  Although not shown here, the storage position (position) of each part data is set in each box data. The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408. In the box data 201, the start address (for example, address 1001) of the position 0001 is set as the storage position of the part E. For example, for example, No. In the box data 203, the start address (eg, address 1001) of position 0001 is set as the storage position of part E, and the start address (eg, address 1002) of position 0002 is set as the storage position of part G. ing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the box data described above (for each effect) at the timing of execution of each effect, and transmits a liquid crystal command to the second sub-control unit 500. Each box data is set together when the first sub control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. At this time, the RAM 408 stores parts data at addresses (part data setting areas) corresponding to a plurality of positions. Note that parts data may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 executes control for effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and returns a command to the first sub-control unit 400. The return command includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command sets the corresponding position in the RAM 408 when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. In the case where the part data is stored, the control data of the sound of the sound layer, the light emission mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory operation layer of the part data is stored in each device or as necessary. It transmits to the sub-control unit 500 and performs an effect corresponding to the effect display.

  FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of command transmission in effect control according to the present embodiment, and is an example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on a liquid crystal command.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85, and performs each effect according to the result. A control command is transmitted to 500.

  For example, when performing the presentation of the conversation notice 01, the first sub-control unit 400 gives the second sub-control unit 500 the No. shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 201 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image of the character (donor) and the character (“?”).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. Based on the position set in the box data 201, the part data is stored at the corresponding address in the RAM 408. That is, in this example, no. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data 201, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the head address (1). As a result, in the area starting at address 1001 of the RAM 408, sound device data of a speech (for example, “n?” Etc.) emitted by the character (donor) corresponding to the conversation notice 01 and the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice Are stored.

  From the first sub-control unit 400, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 201, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the effect of the conversation notice 01 (the character (donor) image and the character ("?") Characters (conversation notice 01). The second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (2). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. The control data is set (3). In this example, since the return command includes information on position 0001, various device data (sound, lamp) corresponding to part E stored in position 0001 (area starting from address 1001) of RAM 408 are stored. L light emission mode) data is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, and the effect is executed (4). In addition, the presentation by the speaker 120 and the lamp L is actually after receiving a command from the main control unit 300, so a time lag occurs.

  FIG. 89 shows another example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command.

  For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect of the conversation notice 03, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the No. shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 203 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display a character (dono) image, a character (“?”) Character, and a character (princess) image, A command for instructing the display of the characters of the dialogue (“Gekiatsu!”) Is included.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. Based on the position set in the box data 203, the part data is stored at the corresponding address in the RAM 408. That is, in this example, no. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data 203, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 starting at address 1001, for example, No. Based on the position 0002 set in the box data 203, the part G is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1002 as the head address (1). As a result, the sound device data of the line (for example, “n?” Etc.) emitted by the character (dono) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored in the area starting at address 1001 of the RAM 408. In the area starting at address 1002 in the RAM 408, sound device data of a line ("Gekiatsu!") From a character (princess) and lamp device data of a corresponding light emission pattern are stored.

  From the first sub-control unit 400, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 203, the second sub-control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 03 (the character (dono) image and the character (“?”)) On the decorative symbol display device 208 (conversation notice 03a). Display of the image of the character (princess) and the text of the dialogue (“Gekiatsu!”) (Display control of display of the conversation notice 03b)) is executed. Thereafter, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a to the first sub control unit 400 (2), and transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b (3). . In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a includes the position 0001 information in the return command. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 starts position 0001 (address 1001 at the head of the RAM 408). Various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part E stored in the area (address area) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, to execute the effect (4) . In addition, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b includes the position 0002 information in the return command, so the position 0002 (address 1002 address) of the RAM 408 is included. The data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part G stored in the area having the head address as the first address is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, to execute the effect ( 5).

  In this way, when one liquid crystal command is a command for instructing execution of a plurality of effect displays (display of conversation notice 03a and conversation notice 03b), and part data (parts E and G) are respectively set, The first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command corresponding to the display control for performing each display from the liquid crystal command, and uses the speaker 120 and the lamp L based on the part data (parts E and G) corresponding to each return command. Perform the production.

  Next, the production system operation process will be described. FIG. 90A is a flowchart of the rendering operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This effect system operation process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85 (a).

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S601). That is, a process of clearing (port clearing) signals input from the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed. Subsequently, the CPU 404 clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S603).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes a chance button operation state determination process (step S605).

  Here, the chance button operation state determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button is operated (step S701). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated by detecting the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated (step S701: Yes), the operation state of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 is updated to the input state (step S703).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the previous operation state of the effect button 136 is OFF and the current operation state of the effect button 136 is ON.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S705: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S707), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the current operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation (step S705: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S707.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated in step S701 (step S701: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the long press operation has ended (step S709). If the CPU 404 determines that the long press operation has ended (step S709: Yes), a box data table related to release of the long press is set (step S711). As a result, a liquid crystal command indicating that the long press is released is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, whereby the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, for example, a chance button indicating an effect button 136. An effect (effect) display may be performed to the effect that the long press has been canceled for the image. It should be noted that the effect display of the long press release in the long press effect and the effect display of the long press release during the long press automatic continuous hit may be different or the same. Furthermore, according to the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, according to the part data corresponding to the set box data table, the sound effect output by the speaker 120 and various lamps 418 according to the effect display of the long press release. Blinking may be performed to enhance the production effect.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S709 that the long press operation has ended (step S709: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S711.

  Returning to FIG. 90A, after executing the chance button operation state determination process, the CPU 404 determines a determination button operation state determination process (step S607), a left button operation state determination process (step S609), and a right button operation state determination. Processing (step S611), up button operation state determination processing (step S613), and down button operation state determination processing (step S615) are sequentially executed. The contents of the determination button operation state determination process, the left button operation state determination process, the right button operation state determination process, the upper button operation state determination process, and the lower button operation state determination process are the same as the chance button operation state determination described above. Since it is the same as the processing, detailed description is omitted.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes various button operation related processes (step S617), and then ends this process.

  Next, various button operation-related processes executed in the production system operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 is a flowchart of various button operation-related processes executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the various button operation-related processes shown in FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S801). When the initial operation flag is not ON (step S801: No), the CPU 404 ends this process. However, when the initial operation flag is ON (step S801: Yes), the various buttons (the effect button 136, the operation key). Assuming that the pressing operation of the unit 137) is performed, the power saving state during the customer waiting demonstration is canceled (step S803). The power saving state is configured to shift when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses without a symbol variation display or various button pressing operations after a standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, for example. Specifically, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 100 is reduced by turning off the various lamps 418 or reducing the brightness, or reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the power saving state may not be entered. The power-saving state is released when one of the various buttons is operated, but the power-saving state can be released even when two or more buttons are operated simultaneously. Alternatively, the power saving state may not be canceled when two or more buttons are operated simultaneously. Further, the power saving state may be canceled only when only one button is operated for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated alone (step S805). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: Yes), the button 404 is executed (step S807), and the process is terminated. Details of the button pressing process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S809). If the CPU 404 determines that the enter button 137e is operated alone (step S809: Yes), it executes a button press-down process to be described later (step S811), and then executes the enter button operation setting display process. (Step S813), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process at the time of operating the enter button will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S809: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is being operated alone (step S815: Yes), it executes a button pressing process (to be described later) (step S817), and then executes a right button operation setting display process. (Step S819), this process is terminated. Details of the right button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821). If the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is being operated alone (step S821: Yes), it executes a button press process (to be described later) (step S823), and then executes a left button operation setting display process. (Step S825), the process ends. The detailed contents of the left button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827). If the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S829), and then executes an upper button operating setting display process. (Step S831), this process ends. The detailed contents of the upper button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the lower button 137b is operated alone as shown in FIG. Step S833). When the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button press processing described later (step S835), and then executes the down button operation setting display processing. (Step S837), this process ends. The detailed contents of the down button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: No), the CPU 404 determines whether both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839). . If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S839: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S841), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839: No), the CPU 404 determines whether both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. (Step S843). If it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: Yes), the CPU 404 executes a button pressing process described later (step S845), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: No), the CPU 404 determines whether all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Is determined (step S847). If the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are being operated (step S847: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S849), and then performs this process. Exit. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S847: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S849. .

  Next, button pressing processing executed in various button operation related processing and various button long press operation related processing described later will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a button pressing process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not an effect receiving an operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is being executed (step S901). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: No), the CPU 404 ends this process, and if it determines that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903). The effect determined here is not limited to the effect that actually presses the button. For example, the effect that prompts the button to be pressed is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, When there is an operation of an effect button 136 or the like, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button effect) is executed is also included.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the operation process once (step S905). . Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed. For example, when an effect requesting a single operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is comprised so that it may determine. Detailed contents of the one-time operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly hitting the button. (Step S907). The effect determined here is not limited to the effect that actually prompts the button to be repeatedly hit. For example, the effect that prompts the button to be hit repeatedly is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, An effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button continuous hit effect) is executed when the repeat operation of the effect button 136 or the like is performed is also included.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated button hits (step S907: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the hitting operation process (step S909). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated hitting of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed. When an effect requesting repeated operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, it is determined that the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly pressing the button on condition that the effect button 136 is operated once. It is configured as follows. The detailed contents of the continuous hit operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect that is being executed is not an effect for repeatedly hitting a button (step S907: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect that is being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button ( Step S911). The effect determined here is not limited to an effect that actually prompts the user to press and hold the button. For example, an effect that prompts the user to press and hold the button is not performed, but a predetermined button ( For example, when a long press operation of an effect button 136 or the like is performed, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button long press effect) is executed is also included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the long-press operation process (step S913). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for long press of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed, For example, when an effect requiring a long press operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is comprised so that it may determine. Details of the long press operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the other button operation processing (step S915). . The detailed contents of the other button operation processing will be described later.

  In step S917, the CPU 404 transmits, to the second sub-control unit 500, a liquid crystal command corresponding to the box set in the one-time operation process, continuous hit operation process, long press operation process, or other button operation process, as described later. After (step S917), this process is terminated.

  Next, the single operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of a one-time operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the one-time operation process.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect of a single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the chance button has been operated. (Step S1003) After turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (Step S1005), the processing of Step S1031 shown in FIG. 95 is executed. In this process, when other buttons are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 is treated as invalid, but treated as valid. It may be.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: No), the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. It is determined whether or not (step S1007). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1009). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the right button 137d is operated, the right button 137d is set. When the right button operation box for executing the effect of the operation is set and both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are both operated. A button operation box for executing the production is set. In this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, when other buttons (for example, the upper button 137a) are operated simultaneously, the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d itself is invalid. However, it may be handled as effective. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In this case, any one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. Even if the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011). If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1013), the step shown in FIG. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1011: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1013. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON and the button operation flag of the right button 137d is OFF. Alternatively, the two button operation flags may be turned on to execute processing in step S1033 described later.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1007 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: No), the effect being executed is the effect button 136 and the left button. It is determined whether or not the simultaneous operation of 137c is performed (step S1015). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1017). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect indicating that the operation has been performed is set and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. A button operation box for executing the production is set. In this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the left button 137c, when other buttons (for example, the lower button 137b) are operated at the same time, the operations of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are invalid. However, it may be handled as effective. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In this case, any one of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is operated. Even if the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019). If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1021), the step shown in FIG. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are not operated (step S1019: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1021. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation flag of the left button 137c is OFF. Alternatively, the two button operation flags may be turned on to execute processing in step S1033 described later.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1015 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: No), as shown in FIG. Is determined to be a simultaneous operation effect of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set. (Step S1025). For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect that the operation is performed is set and the right button 137d is operated, the right button operation box for executing the effect that the right button 137d is operated is displayed. Set. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated is set, and the effect button 136 is set. When both the right button 137d and the right button 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated is set, and the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and When all of the right buttons 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect that all of the effect buttons 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated is set. In this process, when other buttons (for example, the enter button button 137e) are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d, the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In addition, the operation of the right button 137d is handled as invalid, but it may be handled as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. In this case, the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are performed. Even if any one or two of the buttons are operated, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is operated when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Is configured to be set.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d have been operated (step S1027). If the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027: Yes), the CPU 404 sets the button operation flag in the RAM 408 to ON (step S1029), and then step S1031. Execute the process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1027: No), the process of step S1031 is performed without executing the process of step S1029. Run. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d is performed. For example, the processing in step S1033 described later may be executed when the three button operation flags are turned on, for example, by leaving the flag off.

  In step S1031, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S1031). If the CPU 404 determines that the button operation flag is ON (step S1031: Yes), it executes an operation valid period end process (step S1033), and then ends this process. Specifically, the CPU 404 performs processing for ending the operation effective period even before the operation effective period ends, and then sets a box for ending the effect of accepting the button operation. Based on the set box, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command for ending acceptance of the button operation to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, in the second sub control unit 500, after displaying that the acceptance of the button operation is finished, a return command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In addition, when the reception of the button operation is continued until the operation effective period ends, the process for ending the operation effective period may not be performed.

  Next, the continuous hitting operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the continuous hitting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for continuous hitting by the effect button 136 (step S1101). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for repeated hits by the effect button 136 (step S1101: No), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated hits by the effect button 136 (step 1101: Yes), the CPU 404 performs lottery effect lottery and sets the result (step S1103). Specifically, for example, whether or not to increase the continuous hitting meter displayed in the directing effect for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 136, and in the case of increasing the increase, the increase amount is determined by lottery. Set the box according to the result. Then, a liquid crystal command corresponding to the increasing amount of the continuous hitting meter is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an increase display of the continuous hitting meter in a manner corresponding to the liquid crystal command (0th embodiment ).

  Here, the example applicable about the aspect of lottery effect lottery is demonstrated.

(First form)
The comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period may be compared with the interval at which the player operates the button to determine whether the operation is valid or invalid. For example, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.5 seconds, and finally the effect button 136 is operated. Until 0.5 seconds elapse, it is determined that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and it is determined to be effective when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed after 0.5 seconds have elapsed. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.3 seconds, and until 0.3 seconds have passed since the last time the effect button 136 was operated, Even if the button 136 is operated, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid when the production button 136 is operated after 0.3 seconds have elapsed. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the comparison time C is set to 0.1 second, and the effect button 136 is not operated until 0.1 seconds have passed since the last time the effect button 136 was operated. Even if there is an operation, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.1 seconds have elapsed.

(Second form)
In addition, the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation effective period until the first player operation is performed is compared with the interval at which the player operates the effect button 136. The invalidity may be determined. For example, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and at other timings. Disable operation. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is validated at intervals of 0.3 seconds from the initial operation, and the operations at other timings are invalidated. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the operation of the effect button 136 is validated at intervals of 0.1 seconds from the initial operation, and the operations at other timings are invalidated.

(Third form)
In addition, in the effect lottery of the operation effect that can perform the continuous hit operation or the long press automatic continuous hit operation (continuous hit effect lottery), the progress pattern of the effect of the continuous hit effect is larger than the progress pattern of the effect of the long press automatic hit ( For example, while the amount of increase in the continuous hitting meter reaches 70% of the entire meter with 5 operations in continuous hitting operation, it does not increase to 70% of the entire meter unless the liquid crystal command is sent 7 times in the long press automatic hitting. Or the like, or vice versa.

(4th form)
Further, the increase amount due to the continuous hitting operation and the long press automatic continuous hitting operation changes with the passage of the operation effective period (for example, the increase amount increases / decreases as the operation effective period elapses). May be.

(5th form)
Further, the remaining after the end of the determination period in the operation effective period, depending on the number of times that the effect button 136 is operated during a predetermined determination period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the operation effective period (for example, 10 seconds) of the continuous hit effect. It may be configured to select a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute an effect according to an operation in a period (for example, 8 seconds), and perform an effect execution lottery based on the selected lottery table. When winning by lottery, an effect according to the operation is executed, and when not winning, an effect according to the operation may not be performed. More specifically, for example, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is five or more, a low probability lottery table with a low probability of winning in the effect execution lottery is set, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the determination period is set. If the number of times is less than 5, setting a high-probability lottery table with a high probability of winning in the production execution lottery may make it possible to fully enjoy the production contents even for players who are not good at continuous hitting operations. . On the other hand, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is 5 or more, a high probability lottery table is set. If the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is less than 5, the low probability lottery table is set. Thus, there may be a case where a player who has actively performed a continuous hitting operation can be more entertained. In the determination period, it may be determined by lottery whether or not an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. In this case, the lottery table referenced in the predetermined period may be the same as or different from any of the lottery tables referenced in the remaining period. Further, effects may be performed according to all operations. In this case, in the production according to the operation performed in the determination period, for example, the production can be performed until the meter reaches a threshold value (for example, the meter can be increased to a certain value). Also good. Here, the lottery table described above is a table for lottery of whether or not the performance can be performed. However, the lottery table may be configured to determine the amount of change in the performance by lottery.

(Sixth form)
Further, in an effect that operates one or a plurality of buttons with good timing (sometimes referred to as “timing operation effect”) in the operation effective period, an effect period (may be an operation effective period, for example, 15 seconds). The remaining period (for example, the number of times the button is operated in a timely manner during the predetermined determination period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start (the number of times the button is operated during the period in which the operation timing of the corresponding button is determined to be good)) The operation valid period of the timing operation effect in 10 seconds may be determined. For example, if the number of button operations with good timing during the determination period is three or more times, the period during which the operation timing of the corresponding button is determined to be good is the first determination period, and the timing is good during the determination period. If the number of button operations is less than 3 and the second judgment period is the period during which the appropriate button operation timing is judged to be good, the second judgment period is more than the first judgment period. By setting a long time, there may be a case where the content of the performance can be fully enjoyed even by a player who is not good at timing operations. On the other hand, by setting the first determination period longer than the second determination period, there are cases where a player who is good at timing operations can be more entertained. Further, the period during which the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is determined to be good may be the same as or different from either the first determination period or the second determination period. Here, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set longer than the first determination period and the second determination period, the player can practice the timing operation in the determination period. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for a player to participate in an operation effect. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set shorter than both the first determination period and the second determination period, the operation becomes easier as the timing operation effect progresses, so the timing operation is gradually increased. You may be able to feel that you have improved. Further, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set between the first determination period and the second determination period, the timing operation effect can be determined according to the skill of the player, May be able to satisfy both players who are not good at and players who are good at timing operations.

  In the present embodiment, the present invention may be applied only to any one of the 0th to 6th forms, and a plurality of types of effects for continuous hitting are prepared, and the mode is implemented according to the type of effects for consecutive hitting. May be different.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated (step S1105). Then, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 136 is an initial operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1107). That is, it is determined whether or not the production button 136 has been started.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1107: Yes), after setting the time T1 until the next automatic liquid crystal command transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 ( In step S1109), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is set to 500 ms, for example, but can be set to an arbitrary time. As a result, when the long press for the time T1 is performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. Yes.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, if it is determined that the long press automatic continuous hitting is being performed (step S1107: No), then the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted. After setting the time T2 to be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1111), this process is terminated. The time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is 100 ms in this embodiment, for example, but can be set to an arbitrary time. As a result, when the long press is continuously maintained and the time T2 elapses during execution of the effect for continuous hitting, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. It has become.

  The continuous hit operation processing in this embodiment is executed only for the continuous hit operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button (up button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, determination) of the operation key unit 137 is determined. The continuous hitting operation process may be executed for the button 137e).

  Next, the long press operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of a long press operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step 1201: Yes), the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the production button 136 has been started.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1203: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a time T3 until a long press liquid crystal command is transmitted in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1205). ), This process is terminated. The time T3 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted is, for example, 100 ms in this embodiment, but can be set to an arbitrary time. Thereby, during the execution of the effect for long press, the effect can be performed as if the long press of the effect button 136 is started by performing the long press for the time T3.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, when it is determined that the effect button 136 is being pressed (step S1203: No), the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated. A chance button operation box for executing the effect is set (step S1207). Then, after setting the time T4 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted to a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1209), the process is terminated. The time T4 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted is set to, for example, 231 ms in this embodiment, but can be set to an arbitrary time. Thus, during the execution of the effect for long press, when the long press is continued and time T4 has elapsed, it is possible to perform an effect in which the long press of the effect button 136 is maintained. The time T4 set in step S1209 is configured to be set to the same time (231 ms) every time in the present embodiment, but the time set may be changed every time it is set.

  The long press operation processing in this embodiment is executed for the long press operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (up button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, You may make it perform a long press operation process about the determination button 137e).

  Next, other button operation processes executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of other button operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is an operation of the enter button 137e of the operation key unit 137 (step S1301). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is an operation of the determination button 137e (step S1301: Yes), after setting the determination button pressing box for executing the effect that the determination button 137e has been operated (step S1303), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not an operation of the determination button 137e (step S1301: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the right button 137d (step S1305). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: Yes), after setting the right button pressing box for executing the effect that the right button 137d is operated (step S1307), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: Yes), after setting the left button pressing box for executing the effect that the left button 137c has been operated (step S1311), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: Yes), after setting the upper button pressing box for executing the effect that the upper button 137a has been operated (step S1315), This process ends. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation is not the operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: No), it is determined that the operation is the operation of the lower button 137b, and the lower button is pressed to execute the effect that the lower button 137c is operated. After setting the box (step S1317), this process ends.

  Next, a determination button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the setting display process at the time of determination button operation executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S1401). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is from when the power is turned on until the display during return ends. If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401: No), this process ends. In the present embodiment, a volume setting screen and a brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are not displayed during the period from when the power is turned on until the display during restoration ends. Note that the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed and the volume setting and the brightness setting may be performed during the period from when the power is turned on until the display during restoration ends.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related processing is not being executed (step S1401: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S1403). That is, the CPU 404 does not display the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen as shown in FIG. 115 (e) in the standby state where the symbol variation display is not performed, during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, or the like. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is not displayed (step S1403: Yes), the CPU 404 ends the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting display is displayed (step S1403: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 clearly or suggests to the player that the volume and brightness can be set by operating the operation key unit 137 during the customer waiting demonstration displayed in the standby state. It is determined whether an icon is displayed. Even when such an icon is not displayed, the processing in step S1405 is not necessary if the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen is displayed if there is a predetermined operation. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1405: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a brightness setting screen for displaying the current brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the various lamps 418 and the set brightness is displayed. In the present embodiment, the brightness setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. Note that when the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen described later are displayed at the same time, the type of setting screen to be displayed may not be divided depending on the type of button. This brightness setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is (step S1409), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the brightness setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1407: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume setting screen for displaying the current volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the set volume is displayed. In the present embodiment, the volume setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. This volume setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is (step S1413), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the volume setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1411: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1415). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume setting screen or a luminance setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display is displayed. If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1415: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command to hide the setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Later (step S1417), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is not displayed (step S1415: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1417.

  Next, right button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of right button operation setting display processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The left button operation setting display process executed in the various button operation related processes is the same as the right button operation setting display process, and therefore the description of the right button 137d is replaced with the description of the left button 137c. As a matter of course, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S1501). If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501: No), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S1501: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S1503). When it is determined that the setting display is not displayed (step S1503: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is in a non-demo state (step S1505). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed in the standby state. If the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S1505: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the symbol variation setting screen (step S1507), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 sets a liquid crystal command for displaying a volume setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display. A brightness setting screen may be displayed together with the volume setting screen. Further, only the brightness setting screen may be displayed, or a setting screen other than the volume and brightness may be displayed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S1505: No), after setting a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1509), the process is terminated.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1503 that the setting display is not hidden (step S1503: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511: YES), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1513), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1511: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515). If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515: Yes), it executes the brightness setting screen update process (step S1517), and then ends this process. In the present embodiment, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness setting is performed, but the right button 137d (left button 137c) is set. In this case, the luminance setting may not be performed. Details of the brightness setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1515: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update process (step S1521), and ends this process. Details of the volume setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1519: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1523). If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1523: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update processing (step S1525), and then ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is not displayed (step S1523: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1525.

  Next, the brightness setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101A is a flowchart of the brightness setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes user brightness setting operation processing (step S1601). Here, the details of the user brightness setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101B is a flowchart of user brightness setting setting operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the luminance volume knob (step S1701). Specifically, for example, based on a signal output from a luminance volume knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160, the value indicated by the luminance volume knob is acquired. The luminance volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the luminance by a game clerk. That is, the luminance volume knob can be said to be a volume knob for performing luminance master setting. Note that the luminance volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the process as in step S1701 may not be executed. Also, one volume knob may be provided, and the function of the volume volume knob and the function of the luminance volume knob, which will be described later, may be unified by this volume knob.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703). If the CPU 404 determines that the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703: YES), it executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the value of the brightness volume knob is not 0 (step S1703: No), it determines whether or not the current operation is an operation to increase the brightness (step S1705). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a or the right button 137d.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the luminance (step S1705: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the luminance being set is the maximum value (step S1707). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance being set is 10 when the luminance can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the set luminance is the maximum value (step S1707: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the set brightness is not the maximum value (step S1707: No), the CPU 404 increases the brightness by one level (step S1709), and then executes the process of step S1715.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1705 that the current operation is not an operation for increasing the luminance, that is, if it is determined that the operation is a luminance lowering operation (for example, the operation of the down button 137b or the left button 137c) ( Step S1705: No), it is determined whether or not the luminance being set is the minimum value (step S1711). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance being set is 1 when the luminance can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the set luminance is the minimum value (step S1711), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when it is determined that the luminance being set is not the minimum value (step S1711: No), the luminance is lowered by one level (step S1713), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

  In step S1715, the CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the brightness setting display changed as described above (step S1715), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen is kept in a non-display state. Even when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the brightness setting change and the set brightness can be displayed on the decorative design display device 208 in this way.

  Referring back to FIG. 101A, when the CPU 404 executes the user brightness setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the brightness setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the CPU 404 performs the brightness setting display update process. finish. Here, the timer setting until the brightness setting screen is cleared is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including.

  Next, the volume setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102A is a flowchart of the volume setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes a user volume setting operation process (step S1801). Here, details of the user volume setting operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101B is a flowchart of the user volume setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the volume control knob (step S1901). Specifically, for example, based on a signal output from a volume control (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160, the value indicated by the volume control is obtained. The volume control knob is a knob for changing the volume by a game clerk, for example. That is, the volume control knob can be called a volume control for setting the master volume. It should be noted that the volume volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the processing as in step S1901 may not be executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903). If the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903: Yes), it executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume control is not 0 (step S1903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation is an operation for increasing the volume (step S1905). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the right button 137d or the upper button 137a.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the volume (step S1905: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 10 when the volume can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is not the maximum value (step S1907: No), the CPU 404 raises the volume by one level (step S1909), and outputs data for outputting a sound effect for increasing the volume. After setting (step S1911), the process of step S1919 is executed. As a result, every time an operation for increasing the volume is performed, a sound effect indicating that the volume has been increased is output from the speaker 120.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1905 that the current operation is not an operation for increasing the volume, that is, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation is to decrease the volume (for example, an operation of the left button 137c or the lower button 137b) ( Step S1905: No), it is determined whether or not the volume being set is the minimum value (Step S1913). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 1 when the volume can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume being set is not the minimum value (step S1913: No), the volume is lowered by one level (step S1915), and data for outputting a sound effect for lowering the volume is set. (Step S1917), the process of step S1919 is executed.

  In step S1919, the CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the volume setting display changed as described above (step S1919), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the volume control is 0, the volume setting screen is kept in a non-display state. Even when the value of the volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the volume setting change and the set volume can be displayed on the decorative design display device 208 in this way.

  Returning to FIG. 102A, when the user volume setting operation process is executed as described above, the CPU 404 sets a timer until the volume setting screen is deleted (step S1603), and then performs a volume setting display update process. finish. Here, the setting of the timer until the volume setting screen is cleared is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including. The time until the volume setting screen is cleared (timer) and the time until the brightness setting screen is cleared (timer) are the same time, but one time is configured to be longer than the other time. It may be.

  Next, an upper button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the up button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the lower button operation setting display process executed in the various button operation related processes is the same as the upper button operation setting display process, so the description of the upper button 137a is replaced with the description of the lower button 137b. As a matter of course, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S2001). If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the power-on related processing is not being executed (step S2001: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S2003). When it is determined that the setting display is not displayed (step S2003: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is in a non-demo state (step S2005). If the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S2005: Yes), it ends this process.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demonstration state (step S2005: No), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2007), and then ends this process.

  If it is determined in step S2003 that the setting display is not hidden (step S2003: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2011), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S2009: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013). If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the brightness setting screen update process shown in FIG. 101A (step S2015), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S2013: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017: Yes), it executes the volume setting screen update process shown in FIG. 102A (step S2019), and then ends this process. . In the present embodiment, when the up button 137a (down button 137b) is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting is performed, but the up button 137a (down button 137b). Then, the volume may not be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S2017: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S2021). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S2021: Yes), the CPU 404 resets the timer until the symbol variation setting screen is deleted (step S2023), and then performs this process. Exit. The symbol variation setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without operating each direction button of the operation key unit 137, but the processing in step S2023 is executed. The display time of the symbol change setting screen is reset.

  Next, the button long press process will be described. FIG. 104A is a flowchart of the button long press process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This button long press process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S2101). Subsequently, the CPU 404 clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S2103).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes a chance button long press operation state determination process (step S2105).

  Here, the chance button long press operation state determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as the chance button is being pressed and held (step S2201). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated for a long time by detecting that the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port is continuously ON.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 has been pressed for a long time (step S2201: Yes), the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 is updated to a long press state (step S2203). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 has been pressed for a long time (step S2201: No), this process ends.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has passed (step S2205). Specifically, the CPU 404 is set in the time T1 and T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting set in the continuous hitting operation processing shown in FIG. 96 or in the long press operation processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not time T3 and T4 have elapsed until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 (step S2207), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2207.

  Returning to FIG. 104 (a), after executing the chance button long press operation state determination processing, the CPU 404 performs determination button long press operation state determination processing (step S2107), left button long press operation state determination processing (step S2109). , Right button long press operation state determination processing (step S2111), up button long press operation state determination processing (step S2113), and down button long press operation state determination processing (step S2115) are sequentially executed. Note that each of the determination button long press operation state determination process, left button long press operation state determination process, right button long press operation state determination process, up button long press operation state determination process, and down button long press operation state determination process Since the contents are the same as the above-described chance button long press operation state determination process, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes various button long press operation related processing (step S2117), and then ends this processing.

  Next, various button long press operation related processes executed in the button long press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S2301). If the command transmission flag is not ON (step S2301: No), the CPU 404 terminates this process, but if the command transmission flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), the effect button (chance button) 136 is used alone. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the operation is performed. If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2302: Yes), it executes the button pressing process shown in FIG. 93 (step S2305), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2303: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307). If the CPU 404 determines that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2309), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311). If the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2313), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315). If the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2317), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319). If the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2321), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the lower button 137b is operated alone (step S2323). If the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is being operated alone (step S2323: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2325), and then ends this process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S2323: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2325.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested during the display of the effect for one operation, the effect for continuous hitting, the effect of long press, and various setting screens. In addition to the above, when the button other than the button for which the operation is requested is further operated, such as the right button 137d being operated at the same time, any operation is handled to be invalid. For example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested, when the right button 137d is further operated simultaneously with the effect button 136, the effect button 136 is displayed. You may make it handle as having been operated.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  107 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (a), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 107 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 107 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 107 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 107 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of FIG. 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 107 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 107 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 107 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 107 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the decorative symbol variation display is started in FIG. 107 (f).

  As shown in FIG. 107 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started, the effect button 136 is displayed in the effective period (hereinafter, this effective period is referred to as “second operation effective period”). The operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Thus, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image 136P is an example of an operation display related to the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 107 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 107 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 107 (j), a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. It should be noted that even when the effect button 136 is not pressed within the effective period, the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be performed, or the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be performed. May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (j). This also applies to the effect for one-time operation, the effect for continuous hitting, and the effect for long press. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 functions as a second operation result display. Further, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, “operation result display” may be referred to as “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 107 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 107 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner, and is displayed in a reduced size, in FIG. 107 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  108 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 107 in stages.

  In FIG. 108 (p) continuing from FIG. 107 (o), the duel scene animation continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 108 (s). In FIG. 108 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 108 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” determined to be the 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol (round figure) in the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 108 (v) is lit. In FIG. 108 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 108 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached in a different decorative pattern (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 107 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 108 (t). In 108 (u ′), the fluctuation of the decoration pattern combination “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 108 (v ′) following FIG. 108 (u ′), “decoration 6-decoration” is displayed. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 108 (w ′) following FIG. 108 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 108 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 109 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 107 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 109 (b). In FIG. 109 (b), the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 109 (c), as in FIG. 108 (t), all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 109 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” starts. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (e), the fourth symbol (circular shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, an example of the operation result for each gaming state generated by the operation of each button of the effect button and the operation key unit 137 in this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 110A is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and FIG. 110B is a symbol variation display in progress. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in, and the figure (c) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the production button 136 (chance button) is operated in the waiting state demonstration display (animation demonstration display) by animation in the standby state, the animation demonstration display is stopped and the symbol demonstration is performed. Move to display. The symbol demo display is a display showing a variation display result of the last displayed decoration symbol. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demonstration is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, a demonstration effect corresponding to the operation is displayed. Here, for example, when the demonstration effect is capable of executing a plurality of types of effect modes, a game that changes the effect mode, makes a character appear, displays an effect, or explains a game method An effect display for starting explanation or the like. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demonstration is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume or brightness after the setting is confirmed and the setting screen is deleted.

  Further, when the determination button 137e is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the display time of the currently displayed setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is reset to extend the display.

  If the right button 137d is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. In the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased and becomes brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. In the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered and darkened.

  Further, when the upper button 137a is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. In the standby state, when the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated in the standby state and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. In the standby state, when the down button 137b is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period during which the symbol variation is being displayed and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for the one-time operation, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press The production according to the is performed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the symbol variation display and outside the operation effective period of the effect button 136, no operation result is given. In this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be made. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  In addition, if the determination button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the change button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume after setting is fixed and the setting screen being displayed is hidden.

  When the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  If the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the up button 137a is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the up button 137a is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset to extend the display.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset and the display is extended.

  In addition, when the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation while the symbol variation is being displayed, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, when both the effect button 136 and the direction key are pressed at the same time during the execution of the effect for a single operation that requires the operation of the effect button 136 and the direction key, the effect corresponding to this, etc. Is done. Further, if both the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated outside the operation valid period while the symbol variation is being displayed, no operation result is obtained. Even when the operation is not valid, various lamps 418 blink, effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and sound effects are output in accordance with the operation of both the effect button 136 and the direction key. You may do it. At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted during the big hit game, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for the one-time operation, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press The production according to the is performed. In addition, if the effect button 136 is operated during the big hit game and the operation button 136 is not operated, no operation result is obtained. In this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be made. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  In addition, if the determination button 137e is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is given. On the other hand, if the determination button 137e is operated during the jackpot game and the setting screen (volume setting screen or luminance setting screen) is displayed, the volume or luminance after setting is confirmed, and the setting screen being displayed is displayed. You want to hide.

  Further, when the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, a volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. When the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased and becomes brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, a volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is lowered and darkened.

  Further, when the up button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased. Note that if the up button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during a big hit game other than the big hit round (for example, during the pre-hit start effect, during the round effect, during the big end effect, etc.) Not done. Further, when the big hit game is in progress and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the big hit round, the BGM song output during the big hit game is changed. In this embodiment, a plurality of songs are prepared as BGM output during the big hit game. For example, every time the production button 136 + left button 137c is operated, "Song 1"-"Song 3"-"Song" The selected song can be shifted in the reverse direction, such as “2”-“Song 1”.

  In addition, if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit game and other than the big hit round, no operation result is made. In addition, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit game and during the big hit round, the BGM music output during the big hit game is changed. More specifically, every time the production button 136 + the right button 137d is operated, “Song 1” − “Song 2” − “Song 3” − “Song 1”... Is selected in the forward direction. You can transition songs.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. 111 is an effect example that may be executed in some of the effects performed in FIGS. 107 to 109.

  FIG. 111 (1) corresponds to FIG. 107 (o) and displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. As shown in FIG. 111 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In the present embodiment, a state in which the reach is performed by “decoration 7” is shown, and three decorative symbols are also displayed in the lower left of the display screen. These three decorative symbols, for example, are stopped and displayed at the same time in combination of symbols corresponding to the display results of Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, three decorative symbols displayed in the lower left part of the display screen are stopped and displayed at the same time. However, for example, they may be stopped and displayed in order of left, right, and middle. .

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), when the right button 137d is operated, a symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in other light emission modes (for example, blue color). Similarly, when the left button 137c is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. The symbol variation mid-use setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol variation setting screen functions as an example of a volume setting display. In addition, the symbol variation setting screen displayed when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. This setting screen for changing symbols is arranged and displayed in a layer in front of the layer on which the effect display is performed. Therefore, while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the effect display is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels.

  If the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 111 (4) while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 111 (5). Accordingly, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth level. In the present embodiment, the volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in a state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third level, the volume decreases by one level, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG is the second level. It will change to the display which shows. As described above, the volume gauge VG that is variably displayed when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated in a state where the symbol variation setting screen is displayed is an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. There are cases where it is possible. In the present embodiment, only the sound volume can be set during symbol variation. However, brightness setting, effect mode, BGM, and the like may be set. In addition, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto repeat function is activated during the long pressing time, and the volume increases by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured (to decrease), or the volume may not be increased (not decreased) as long as the operation is not performed once so that the auto repeat function is not activated. Further, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the sound volume is fixed to the set value and the symbol variation setting screen is deleted. It may be. In addition to this, for example, the input password may be determined by operating the effect button 136 on the password input screen. That is, in this case, it can be said that the effect button 136 functions as a first operation means for performing various settings.

  FIG. 111 (6) corresponds to FIG. 108 (p), and the duel scene animation continues. In this effect example, the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is then started at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (7). Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated simultaneously within the effective period. The The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that represents the remaining time of the effective period. 136P2 is included. At this time, an effect waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Here, the operation waiting animation is, for example, an animation in which a button is retracted or protruded repeatedly. Here, a still image may be displayed without performing the operation waiting animation display. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation valid period is before the start, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid. Note that the operation promotion notification image may be displayed at the same time as the operation effective period starts. Here, the operation effective period is a period in which the period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled and the period in which the operation of the right button 137d is enabled overlap. The operation effective period here includes an overlapping period when the effective period of the operation is started and then the effective period of the operation of the other button is started. Further, it is also possible to produce an effect of continuous hitting operation or long press operation during the effective period of the operation started first, and to perform an effect of adding two or more buttons simultaneously. On the other hand, the effective period of the operation of one button overlaps the effective period of the operation of the other button, and then the effective period of the operation of one (other) button ends and the other (one) operates. For example, after performing the simultaneous operation of two or more buttons, the operation of one (the other) button is continuously performed. You may produce the structure of performing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display including the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 may be referred to as an example of the first operation display regarding the operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means. .

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (10), as shown in FIG. 111 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 111 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display screen may be hidden. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect display (first operation result display) is performed as if the effect movable body 225 is shining. That is, an operation result effect is performed. The effect button 136 and the right button 137d emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. Thereby, it is notified in advance that the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit. In addition, it may be performed even when the result of the symbol variation display is not a big hit, so that a high degree of expectation for the big hit may be produced. Here, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not limited to the case where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing, and the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is pressed. It goes without saying that the case where the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the right button 137d is pressed is also included. That is, it is only necessary that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. Note that the effect of simultaneous operation as shown in FIG. 111 (12) may be started only when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. Further, when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is pressed and the other is not operated within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it may not be handled as a simultaneous operation.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 225 provides an effect by simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. However, the effect movable body 225 also performs the operation even when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period. It is comprised so that an effect may be performed. Note that when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period, the effect by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed. In addition, the content of the effect to be executed may be different between the case where the simultaneous operation is performed within the operation effective period and the case where the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period. If the simultaneous operation is performed at the same time, an effect with a high expectation to the big hit is performed, and if the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period, an effect with a low expectation to the big hit is performed. You may make it like that and vice versa.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is suggested that the greater the number of buttons that require an operation, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot in the symbol variation display. Thereby, as the number of buttons increases, the player has a higher expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, it can be said that the display shown in FIG. 111 (8) or the like functions as the change notice. Note that the degree of expectation for jackpots in the symbol variation display may be the same regardless of the number of buttons that require an operation. Further, it may be performed as a pre-reading notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (13), the animation of the duel scene is resumed. In FIG. 111 (14), the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman, and then, as shown in FIG. 111 (15), At the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner. In the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, three decorative symbols are still displayed in a variable manner.

  In the present embodiment, the luminance setting cannot be performed during the symbol variation display, but the luminance setting may be performed. The setting method in this case can be performed in the same manner as the volume setting. For example, in the case of the luminance setting, the up / down symbol changing setting for luminance setting is performed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. The brightness may be set by displaying a screen, and the brightness may be changed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. That is, the symbol variation setting screen displayed when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is operated may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation, and the symbol variation setting screen may be displayed. In the displayed state, the luminance gauge that is variably displayed when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is operated may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIGS. 112 (a1) to (a5) show a case where only one button is operated when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed. 112 (b1) to FIG. 112 (b5) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 112 (a1) to FIG. 112 (a5), and FIG. 112 (c1). ) To (c5) show that when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed, one of the buttons is operated first and the state is maintained while the other is maintained. An example of the effect when the button is operated is shown.

  FIG. 112 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (a2), when the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is non-displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (a3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed. Here, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 may not be changed even when the right button 137d is operated. If the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set. From the start of the display for prompting (button operation promotion display) to the end of the symbol variation display, the display of the symbol variation setting screen is prohibited and the volume setting is not performed. That is, the volume setting is prohibited from the timing of FIG. 111 (7) until the symbol variation display is completed. Note that the volume setting may be prohibited only while the button operation promotion display is being performed. The volume setting may be prohibited only during the period from the start of the button operation promotion display to the end of the operation result effect.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (a4), as shown in FIG. 112 (a5), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode during operation to the display during non-operation. It changes into a mode and an operation result effect is not performed yet.

  FIG. 112 (b1) is also a display corresponding to FIG. 111 (10), but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), when only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is non-displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (b3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation result effect is not performed. Further, since both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated at the same time, the operation valid period continues, and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 as well as the right button image 137dP1. The corresponding remaining time display bar 136P2b is also displayed in such a manner that the meter continues to decrease despite the right button 137d being operated.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (b4), as shown in FIG. 112 (b5), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of operation to the display at the time of non-operation. It changes into a mode and an operation result effect is not performed yet.

  FIG. 112 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (c2), when the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (c3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (c4), when the effect button 136 is operated with the right button 137d being operated, the operation result effect is started as shown in FIG. 112 (c5). The same applies to the case where only the effect button 136 is operated first and the right button 137d is operated in that state. That is, when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated or pressed for a long time and the other button is operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. A result similar to the case (execution of the operation result effect) is obtained.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIGS. 113 (a1) to 113 (a2) show a case where only one button is operated when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed. 113 (b1) to FIG. 113 (b2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 111 (7) to FIG. 111 (8), and FIG. 113 (c1). ) To (c2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (8).

  FIG. 113 (a1) shows a state where only the right button 137d is pressed for a long time without operating the effect button 136. Therefore, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of non-operation to the display mode at the time of operation. After that, for example, when the remaining 1/3 of the effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 113 (a2), it is as if the effect button image 136P1 vibrates with the character display “please also press the chance button”. Animation display (vibration animation display) is started, and a display further prompting the operation of the button that has not been operated is performed. The start timing of the vibration animation display is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined time (for example, one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated) The vibration animation display may be started when 3 seconds) elapses. The vibration animation display ends when the corresponding button (the effect button 136 in FIG. 113 (a2)) is operated. As described above, when only one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated and a predetermined time has elapsed, a display (vibration animation display) different from the normal display (operation waiting animation display). ) May be performed.

  113 (b1) to FIG. 113 (b2) correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to (8), but in FIG. 113 (b2), the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed, and only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed. Is displayed.

  113 (c1) to (c2) also correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to (8), but in FIG. 113 (c2), in addition to the right button image 137dP1 and the effect button image 136P1. A left button image 137cP1 is further displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the big hit is changed by changing the number of displayed button images. For example, as the number of displayed button images increases, It is configured to have high expectations.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 114 (a) corresponds to FIG. 111 (7), and the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. And as shown in FIG.114 (b), in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the operation promotion alerting image which urges | turns both the production button 136 and the right button 137d to the state operated simultaneously within the effective period is displayed. The In FIG. 114 (b), as the operation promotion notification image, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b representing the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed corresponding to each button image together with the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Has been. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (b), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (c), at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (d), as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 and the right button image 137dP1 changes to gray out display. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2b displays that the remaining time is zero. The right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (g), the effect movable body 225 moves to a position that covers the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a turning operation that vibrates on the spot is performed, so that an operation result effect may be performed. It suggests that you can't. Note that the turning operation by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (h), when the operation of the right button 137d is released and the effect button 136 is operated, the effect movable body 225 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device as shown in FIG. 114 (i). In some cases, the display moves to a position covering the entire 208 display screen. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described effect display.

  As described above, the operation result effect may be performed by performing the button operation once in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136 in the operation effective period. It should be noted that in this effect example, the operation result effect may be performed by operating two buttons once for the effect button 136 and the right button 137d regardless of the operation order, or in the correct order ( For example, the operation result effect may be performed on condition that the button operation is performed in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136). The operation result effect may also be performed when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously. In this case, for example, when only the effect button 136 is operated or only the right button 137d is operated, the moving operation by the effect movable body 225 is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 114 (g), and the effect button When both 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 114 (i) may be performed.

  If the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 114 (h), but the operation result effect is not performed, the effect movable body 225 descends as shown in FIG. 114 (i ′). Ascending without being performed, an effect that failed to produce a single button operation is performed. At this time, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the effect button image 136P1 changes to gray-out display, and the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2a displays that the remaining time is zero. Become. As a result, it is notified that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d have been operated. The effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (j ′), the animation of the duel scene is resumed, and a state in which the main character Tono-sama lost to the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when requesting the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. Although the display prompting the operation of the button requesting the operation is performed so as to prompt the operation, for example, the display prompting the operation of the button other than the button requesting the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when a single operation of the effect button 136 is requested, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. However, if only the effect button 136 is operated, the operation result effect is performed. May be performed. Further, a display that prompts the user to operate a button different from the button that requests the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the operation of the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, but the operation result effect is not performed even if the effect button image 136P1 is operated, and the right button 137d is operated. In such a case, an operation result effect may be performed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the operation effective period is not started, and thereafter, the operation promotion notification image is deleted, so-called fake effects. You may make it perform. As the effect of fake, for example, in the effect that the operation promotion notification image is displayed when the two effect button images 136P1 are close to each other and overlap, the two effect button images 136P1 are not overlapped. An effect that the button operation effect is not started and an operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the target button that is urging the operation becomes difficult to press mechanically or is displaced to an inoperable position. There may be an effect that makes it impossible to press the button.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining an example of the setting operation using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  115, there are a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a special symbol 1 4th symbol LED 285a and a special symbol 2 4th symbol LED 285b are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 200. The 4th symbol LED 285a for the special figure 1 notifies whether or not the special figure 1 is changing the symbol by its lighting mode, and the 4th symbol LED 285b for the special symbol 2 indicates the special symbol 2 by the lighting mode. Informs whether or not the symbol is changing. For example, the 4th design LED 285a for the special figure 1 and the 4th design LED 285b for the special figure 2 blinks at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the design variation display, and the display result is lost. It is configured to turn off and turn on when the display result is a big hit, but the lighting mode can be set arbitrarily, so that the emission color varies according to the symbol variation display state It may be.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (a), a jackpot start effect indicating that the jackpot game has been started is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of how to hit right is displayed. In addition, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 is turned off, indicating that the display result is lost, and the 4th design LED 285b for special figure 2 is turned on, indicating that the display result is a big hit. Has been. That is, the big hit this time is a big hit by displaying the special figure a on the second special figure display device 214.

  FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which the first round is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect during the big hit round. Then, “1R” indicating that it is the first round is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first big hit game is shown below the hitting display. “BONUS × 1” is displayed. In the present embodiment, a music name display MT indicating the music name of the BGM output from the speaker 120 is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which the third round is executed. At this time, when the right button 137d (or the left button 137c) is operated once as shown in FIG. 115 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 sets the volume as shown in FIG. 115 (e). A screen is displayed. Note that the volume gauge VG on the volume setting screen indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels. Note that the volume setting screen may be displayed or deleted when the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. By doing so, the player intends to operate the volume setting screen. By doing so, it may be possible to set the volume, and it may be possible to suppress the annoyance that the volume setting screen is displayed by an unintended operation.

  When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 115 (f) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 115 (g). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth level.

  If the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 115 (h) while the volume setting screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (i). The volume is not increased or decreased, the BGM song is changed, and the changed song name is displayed in the song name display MT. In other words, the present embodiment is configured so that the volume cannot be changed while the effect button 136 is being operated. Note that the volume setting screen is deleted after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after any one of the direction buttons in the operation key unit 137 is last operated. Here, when the direction button 136 and any one of the direction buttons in the operation key unit 137 are operated at the same time, the direction button may not be operated. Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction button are operated at the same time, the volume setting screen may be deleted.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram for describing an effect example using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display region 280 at the lower center of the effect display region 208d, and a hold icon display region 281 of Special Figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display region 280. .

  In the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of holding icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon.

  In FIG. 116 (a), one hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 has a default display mode (round shape). In a white and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In addition to the default display mode, the hold icon can also be displayed in the display mode of a pre-reading notice, and can also function as a pre-reading notice for a pending symbol variation display.

  In the variation icon display area 280, the variation icon h0 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition to the default display mode, the change icon h0 can be displayed in a preview display mode, and can function as a preview display for the symbol change display.

  116 (a), when the right button 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the volume setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (c). Is displayed. At this time, according to the volume gauge VG, it is indicated that the volume is the fourth of the five levels. In this embodiment, it is configured so that no operation result is obtained even when a button to which an effect or function according to the operation is not assigned is operated. For example, the button is operated. You may make it perform the effect production to the effect of confirming. The effect effect may be an effect by sound output from the speaker 120 or light emission of the lamps by the various lamps 418 in addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image 136 </ b> P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (d), since it is before the start of the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. On the other hand, the volume setting is valid, and the volume can be changed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. Further, since the remaining time display bar 136P2 is arranged and displayed on the layer on the back side of the volume gauge VG, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so as to overlap the volume gauge VG and is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, although the decorative symbol variation display is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can display the special symbol by a variation symbol displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Can be recognized as fluctuating. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (e), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously as shown in FIG. 116 (f), FIG. As shown in 116 (g), neither the operation result effect performed by operating the effect button 136 nor the volume change. That is, the operations of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are treated as invalid. Note that the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2 hidden in the volume gauge VG is displayed in a reduced manner with the passage of time.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last time the direction key was operated, the volume setting screen is deleted and the remaining time display bar 136P2 appears as shown in FIG. 116 (h). In this case as well, unless the operation of the right button 137d is stopped, it is not treated as valid even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  Next, the relationship between the operation of the effect button 136 and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 118. Here, FIG. 117A is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during execution of the effect for repeated hitting, and FIG. 117B is the effect for repeated hitting. FIG. 6C is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the long press operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during the execution of the effect, and FIG. 10C shows the long press operation by the effect button 136 during the execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between a production | presentation display. FIG. 118 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for long press.

  In the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect pattern of the decorative symbol variation display according to the received command. To do. Then, in the production by the decided production pattern, production lottery is performed as to whether or not various productions are executed. All the box data of the production contents decided to be executed by the production lottery are read out, the part data contained in the read out box data is stored in the RAM 408, and the liquid crystal command contained in the box data is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. To the second sub-control unit 500.

  As a liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the start of the symbol variation display, for example, a background command for designating a background, a timer command for designating a variation time, and a pending number are designated. Hold number change command to be held, hold display command to specify the display position and color of the hold icon, notice command to specify the contents of the notice, reach command to specify the contents of the reach to be executed, temporary stop to specify the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped There are a design command, a final stop design command for designating a decorative design to be displayed when the design is stopped. Here, the timer command includes data that can specify the pre-reach performance time (notice timer) and the reach performance time (reach timer).

  Then, in the second sub-control unit 500, control is performed so that the designated effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, when a predetermined effect display is performed, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub control unit 400. When receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes control corresponding to the received return command.

  When an effect for continuous hitting is performed during symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 117 (A) and (B), liquid crystal is transferred from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing a. When the command is transmitted, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the effect for repeated hitting at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly operated, the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of A1, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 and displays the effect display that the effect button 136 is operated on the decorative symbol display device 208. Done.

  Thereafter, similarly, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C1 (E1) and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control In the unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D1 (F1), and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the long press operation is performed by pressing and holding the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is displayed. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing B1 and displays the effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 (for example, 500 ms) elapses until a liquid crystal command for automatic hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2, and the effect button 136 is operated. The effect design display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the second operation has been performed by the effect button 136 unless at least the time T1 has elapsed since the operation was started. Therefore, when the striking operation is performed, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and display more effects that the effect button 136 has been operated than when the long press operation has been performed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, each time of E2 (E2, G2, I2... At the timing), the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, (F2, H2 , J2... (At each timing), an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated unless at least the time T2 has elapsed. Accordingly, when the striking operation is performed, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and display more effects that the effect button 136 has been operated than when the long press operation has been performed. Is possible.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 117 (A) and (B), when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing of g, A return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 also ends the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, the operation is treated as invalid.

  If the execution result of the operation result effect is satisfied by the continuous hitting operation or the long press automatic continuous hitting function before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation effective period. A return command for starting the operation result effect is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub-control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, but the liquid crystal command is received by the second sub-control unit 500. Sometimes, when the operation valid period has expired, the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed. I will not.

  When an effect for long press is performed during symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at timing a, The second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing α, but at this time, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when a time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of A3. If a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B3, and uses the effect button 136. An effect display indicating that the long press operation is being performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 may recognize that a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed if at least time T3 has not elapsed since the operation was started. Can not.

  Thereafter, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted (at timings C3, E3,...). ), A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 because the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing, and the second sub-control unit 500 (D3, F3) In response to reception of the liquid crystal command (at each timing of...), An effect display indicating that a long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid.

  If the execution result of the operation result effect by the long press operation is satisfied before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation effective period and starts the operation result effect. Is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 to end the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub-control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  Next, an operation when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (A) shows a state in which an effect for continuous hitting is performed during symbol variation.

  First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at timing a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the effect for repeated hitting at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the B1 When the liquid crystal command is received at the timing, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 (for example, 500 ms) elapses until a liquid crystal command for automatic hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2, and the effect button 136 is operated. The effect design display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 has been released at the timing β1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing C2, the first sub-control unit 400 sends the button release liquid-crystal command to the first sub-control unit 400. 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of β2, the second sub control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of E4, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F4, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 elapses until the liquid crystal command for auto-striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of G4. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of H4, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, if the long press operation is temporarily interrupted during the operation valid period and then the long press operation is performed again, the liquid crystal is displayed until the time T1 elapses after the long press operation is started, as in the case of the first long press operation. The command is not sent. When the long press operation is performed again during the operation valid period, the liquid crystal command may be transmitted when time T2 has elapsed since the long press operation was started. Further, the liquid crystal command is transmitted when a time different from the time T2 (which may be longer or shorter than the time T2) has elapsed after the long press operation is started again. Also good.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the effect button 136 is operated once every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 indicates that the effect button 136 has been operated in response to reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T2 has elapsed at the timing g and the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 At the timing of h when the sub control unit 500 receives the command, the operation valid period has already ended, so that the operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an operation in a case where the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the long press effect will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (B). FIG. 118 (B) shows a state in which an effect for long press is performed during symbol variation.

  First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at timing a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α1, but at this time, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when a time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of A3. If there is, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of B3, and an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when a time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until a long press liquid crystal command is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the operation button 136 is continuously pressed at the timing of C3. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D3, an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 is released at the timing of γ1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C3, the liquid crystal command for button release is sent to the first sub-control unit. 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of γ2, the second sub control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of α2, and when the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of E5. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F <b> 5, and an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued every time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs a long press operation with the effect button 136 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T4 has elapsed at the timing of G5 and the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, At the timing when the second sub-control unit 500 receives the command, since the operation valid period has already ended, the long press operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an example of the effect for repeated hits in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. Here, FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative design display apparatus 208 of stepwise.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the state has reached a reach state and has been developed into a super reach (a panda group attack reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (a), it is indicated that the “decoration 7” has been reached, and three decorative symbols are displayed in the lower left of the display screen.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), after an effect display is shown in which countless pandas are pressed, an effect button 136 is displayed as shown in FIG. 119 (c). By repeating the hit operation, a character display “defeat all the pandas by hitting the button repeatedly” is suggested, which indicates that the mission may be achieved and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts the player to strike the effect button 136 repeatedly and defeat all the pandas within the operation effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 119 (d) is a state before the operation effective period (first operation effective period) starts, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. The text “Preparation” to that effect is displayed, and then the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (e). At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “100 more characters” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is 100.

  For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of A1 in FIG. 117 (A), as shown in FIG. 119 (f), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing B1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (g). As shown, the text display is updated to “98 more characters” indicating that two pandas have been defeated. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time. Thus, in the effect for continuous hitting, the effect display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as an example of the first effect display.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of C1 in FIG. 117 (A), as shown in FIG. 119 (h), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub-control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing D1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (i). As shown, the text display of “72 more characters” indicating that 26 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing E1 in FIG. 117 (A), as shown in FIG. 119 (j), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F1 in FIG. 117A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (k). As shown, the character display of “50 more characters” indicating that 22 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Then, in response to the continuous operation by the effect button 136 being continuously performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is reduced, as shown in FIG. 119 (l). The effect button 136 is operated before the operation valid period ends after the update display to the character display of “one more” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 119 (m), the character display of “0 more characters” indicating that all the pandas have been defeated is updated, as shown in FIG. 119 (n). In addition, an effect that the chief character throws up the panda is performed, and it is informed that three “decorations 7” are a big hit. That is, in this production example, since the execution result of the operation result production by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, the production results production (first result display) as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to (n). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation effective period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m ′), an effect that the longest character is knocked out by the panda is lost. At the same time, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) to 119 (m), by operating the production button 136 in succession, it is suggested that the mission is achieved and there is a possibility that a big hit will be achieved. The character display “Defeat all pandas” is performed, and a series of displays in which an operation promotion notification image that prompts the player to defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period by repeatedly striking the effect button 136 may be referred to as repeated operation display. is there.

  120 shows the same effect as FIG. 119, but shows a state in which a continuous hitting operation using the long press automatic continuous hitting function by a long press operation of the effect button 136 is being performed.

  120 (a) to 120 (e) are the same as FIGS. 119 (a) to (e), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Then, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started as shown in FIG. 120 (f) at the timing A1 (first timing) in FIG. 117 (B) (that is, the length of the effect button 136). When the push operation is started), a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 400 performs the second operation at the timing B1 in FIG. When the sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is updated to display “98 more characters” indicating that two pandas have been defeated, as shown in FIG. 120 (g). . The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time.

  After that, at the timing before the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for auto-striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, timing D1 in FIG. 117A), Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, as shown in FIG. 120 (h), the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated.

  Thereafter, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, the timing T2 (second timing) in FIG. 117B is reached, and the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous stroke is transmitted has elapsed. Then, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 in FIG. 117 (B), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has defeated 26 pandas as shown in FIG. 120 (i). The text display is updated to “72 more characters”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is functioned as an example of the first time.

  Thereafter, at the timing before the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous stroke is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, the timing of F1 in FIG. 117A), Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, as shown in FIG. 120 (j), the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated.

  Thereafter, when the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, when the time T2 until the operation of the liquid crystal command for automatic repetitive operation is reached at the timing E2 in FIG. A liquid crystal command indicating that the operation has been performed once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F2 in FIG. 117 (B), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has defeated 22 pandas as shown in FIG. 120 (j). The text display is updated to “50 more characters”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is functioned as an example of the second time.

  Then, in response to the long press operation with the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display in which the number of remaining pandas to be decremented decreases every time T2 elapses. As shown in 119 (l), after a time T2 has elapsed after the update display to the character display of “one more” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one, the decoration In the symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 120 (m), the character display of “0 more characters” indicating that all pandas have been defeated is updated, and as shown in FIG. An effect that the character throws away the panda is performed, and it is notified that three “decorations 7” are a big hit. That is, in this production example, since the execution result of the operation result production by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, the production results production (first result display) as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to (n). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation effective period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m ′), an effect that the longest character is knocked out by the panda is lost. At the same time, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect for long press in this embodiment is demonstrated, referring FIG. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of an effect for long press centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the player has entered a reach state and has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (a), it is shown that the reach state has been reached with “decoration 7”, and three decorative symbols are displayed in the lower left of the display screen. An animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In FIG. 121 (b), the duel scene animation continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (c), an effect for long press by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (c), before the operation effective period (second operation effective period) starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, when the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (d), a “long press” character display for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Thereafter, for example, at the timing of α in FIG. 117 (C) (third tying), as shown in FIG. 121 (e), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started. The liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is not operated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used until a time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (f), the same display mode as in FIG. 121 (d) is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing A3 in FIG. 117 (C) after the time T3 has elapsed, it is indicated by B3 in FIG. 117 (C). At the timing, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (g), the display image of the swordsman displayed on the upper part of the display screen is enlarged, while the display image of the swordsman is reduced, The display which produces that it is slightly dominant is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display screen of Tono-sama displayed above the display screen is enlarged may be referred to as an example of the second effect display. In this embodiment, the time T3 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted functions as an example of the third time.

  Thereafter, the time T4 elapses while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained. For example, the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of C3 in FIG. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, at the timing shown by D3 in FIG. 117 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (h) While the display screen of Tono-sama displayed above the display screen is further enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is further reduced to display that the Ton-sama is considerably dominant.

  Then, in response to the long press operation with the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the display image of Tono-sama gradually expands every time T4 elapses. When the execution result of the operation result effect (second result display) by the long press operation is satisfied, for example, effect display as shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (h), the display of the operation promotion notification image that promotes the long press operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as a long press operation display.

  Next, an example of the step-up effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. Here, FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of the step-up effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 123 is an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the continuation step by step, and FIG. 124 is a diagram showing another effect example performed in the effect shown in FIG. 122.

  122, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal symbol hold. A lamp 216, a fourth symbol LED 285a for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol LED 285b for special figure 2 are shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In response to this, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is also stopped and displayed in the lower left part of the display screen of the ornamental symbol display device 208. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 and the 4th design LED 285b for special figure 2 are both turned off, indicating that the display result is lost.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 122 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

  122 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and these three hold icons h11, h12, All of h13 are displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  In FIG. 122 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started and the symbol variation is started in the first special symbol display device 212, but the change has not yet occurred in the hold icon and the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 122 (3), the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 by the change animation of the hold icon and moved to the change icon h0. Thus, the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1, and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. The display moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started. At this time, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 starts blinking. Note that the start timing of the hold icon movement animation may be before the start of the decorative symbol variation display, may be simultaneously with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation may be started. It may be after the start of display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two “decorations 7” stop and enter a reach state. In the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 122 (5) shows a state of development to super reach (Echigoya reach). In this super reach, the character display “Secure Echigoya” is suggested, which suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a more reliable reach production by capturing the character of Echigoya during the reach production. This Echigoya reach is a reach including a step-up effect in which the effect for one operation is performed at most three times.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 122 (6), when the transition to Echigoya reach is performed, the first effect for the first operation (the effect of step-up 1) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a thousand boxes. A state in which the character of Echigoya is being chased by the character of the main character Tono-sama is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (7), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (8), as shown in FIG. 122 (9), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, FIG. 122 (10). As shown in the figure, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an effect that the first operation for the first operation is successful and the second operation for the operation is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (10) is also displayed when there is no operation of the effect button 136 until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without any operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, effects such as those shown in FIG. 122 (10) after display as shown in FIG. 124 (a1) described later).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (11), the second operation for the first operation (the effect of step-up 2) is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the Echigoya with a thousand boxes is the main character. The state of being chased by this character is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (12), the operation valid period is before the start, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period as shown in FIG. 122 (14), FIG. 122 (15). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect that the effect for the first operation for the second time is successful, and that the effect is shifted to the effect for the first operation for the third time. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (15) is also displayed when there is no operation of the effect button 136 until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without any operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, after the display as shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later is performed, the effect as shown in FIG. 122 (15)).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (16), the third operation for the first operation (the effect of step-up 3) is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the Echigoya with a thousand boxes is the main character. The state of being chased by this character is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (17), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (18), as shown in FIG. 123 (19), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, FIG. 123 (20). As shown in FIG. 6, the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the Tono-sama character has captured the Echigoya character, and thus the third operation for the first operation has been successful. The effect shown in FIG. 123 (20) is also displayed when there is no operation of the effect button 136 until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without any operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, after the display as shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later is performed, the effect as shown in FIG. 123 (20)).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of shifting to special reach, which is an advanced reach of Super Reach, because it has succeeded in producing one operation for three times. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to dark display, leaves the decorative symbol displayed in the lower left part of the display screen, and makes other displays difficult to see. As shown in 123 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display indicating that a swordsman reach, which is an example of a special reach, is started.

  Thus, it can be said that the effect for the first operation for the first time is an example of the first continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the first operation for the second time. The second one-time operation effect can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in the relationship of the first one-time operation effect, and the third one-time operation effect. In this relationship, it can be said to be an example of the first continuous effect display. In addition, the effect for the first operation for the third time can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the first operation for the second time.

  124 (a1) to 124 (a3) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 122 (9) in a stepwise manner. 124 (a1) to FIG. 124 (a3) show examples of effects when the first operation effect for the first time has failed.

  FIG. 124 (a1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the first operation effect for the first time, or that the Echigoya character escapes after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the first operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the lower left part of the display screen temporarily stops at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” and shakes. It shows how the change is taking place.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” even in the center of the display screen, and it is lost. Informed.

  124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 122 (14) in a stepwise manner. 124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) show examples of effects when the second operation effect for the first time has failed.

  FIG. 124 (b1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the second operation for the first operation, or the Echigoya character escapes with a thousand boxes after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the second operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 7” is formed again, and, for example, normal reach is performed. Note that the present invention is not limited to normal reach, and other reach effects other than normal reach (for example, long reach, super reach, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 124 (c1) to FIG. 124 (c3) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 123 (19) in a stepwise manner. 124 (c1) to FIG. 124 (c3) show another example of effects when the third operation effect for the first time is successful.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the Tono-sama character wears sunglasses and rides on a motorcycle to follow the character of Echigoya. The effect shown in FIG. 124 (c1) is for the first operation for the third time after the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the effect for the first operation for the third time, or after the operation effective period ends. The notification that the production has been successful is made, but at this time, it is not the production that the character of Echigoya is caught as shown in FIG. 123 (20), but the character of Tono-sama is not shown in FIG. 122 (15). This is an effect that transitions after an effect indicating that the player is chasing around continuously, and a premium effect (an effect of step-up 4) that is determined to be a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the full rotation reach, and displays the variation at a low speed while maintaining a state in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (c3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” and notifies that a big hit has occurred.

  Next, the relationship between the effect content and the operation of the effect button 136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. 125 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect button 136. FIG. 126 shows the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect button 136. It is a figure explaining the relationship with operation | movement.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is driven by an effect button drive motor 434 in order to improve the effect, and an operable position (first position) that can be pressed by the player, and the player. It is possible to displace between the operation impossible position (second position) where the pressing operation cannot be performed. The operable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most protruded, and the inoperable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most recessed. The inoperable position is, for example, a position where the upper end edge of the flange-shaped flange portion provided at the upper end of the cylindrical button case surrounding the side wall of the button body of the effect button 136 and the upper surface of the button body are flush with each other. It may be a position where the upper surface of the button body is recessed from the upper edge of the collar. The condition for displacing the effect button 136 to the inoperable position is, for example, a case where the pressing of the effect button 136 is restricted in order to operate another effect button. When the button return condition is satisfied after the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position, the effect button drive motor 434 is driven to perform initial position return control for returning the effect button 136 from the inoperable position to the operable position. At this time, for example, the player may be pushing the effect button 136 and cannot return due to the pressing force. As a result, when the drive time of the effect button drive motor 434 elapses, the effect button 136 cannot return to the operable position and remains in the inoperable position. Thereafter, for example, by performing initial position return control every time a return condition such as the start of symbol variation display is established, it is possible to avoid such a situation from being maintained. . In addition, in the state where the production button 136 is maintained in the inoperable position, it is determined that the production button 136 is in the ON state. For example, during the execution of the effect for long press or the effect for continuous hitting, the long press It is determined that the operation is performed, and during the execution of the operation for one operation, it is not determined that the effect button 136 is operated unless there is an operation from OFF to ON. Become.

  125 (a1) to 125 (a3) show an example in which initial position return control is performed at the start of symbol variation display.

  FIG. 125 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state in which it has not been returned to the inoperable position in the previous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 125 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the detection state of the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine that it is not in position. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is a position after the power-on operation (initial operation) performed when the power is turned on.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes an initial position returning process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, whereby the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and the effect button 136 is set to the initial position as shown in FIG. 125 (a3). Returned. Note that FIG. 125 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (3). The timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started may be before the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be after the start of the decorative symbol variation display.

  125 (b1) to 125 (b3) illustrate an example in which the initial position return control is performed when the above-described Echigoya reach is performed.

  FIG. 125 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (10). That is, it is informed that the transition to the effect of step-up 2 is made. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 125 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (11). That is, a state in which the effect of step-up 2 (second continuous effect display) has been started is shown. The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 2 has been started. Determine the state. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine that it is not in position.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes an initial position return process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, whereby the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the operation effective period in the effect is started. That is, the effect button 136 is controlled to be returned to the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Note that FIG. 125 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (12). Note that the timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started is not limited to the above-described timing. For example, a return command indicating that the operation promotion notification image is displayed is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The initial position returning operation may be started based on the fact that the signal is received. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step up 2, but the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step up 1, the effect of step up 3, and the effect of step up 4. You may do it.

  FIG. 126 (a1) to FIG. 126 (a3) show an example in which the initial position return operation is not performed even though the step-up effect in the Echigoya reach described above is performed.

  FIG. 126 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (4). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (5). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 1 has been started, but the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 stores Since the part data for performing the initial position return operation corresponding to the return command is not set, the effect button 136 remains in the inoperable position without performing the initial position return operation.

  FIG. 126 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (8). As described above, the effect button 136 does not perform the initial position return operation in step-up 1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 126 (a3), the effect button 136 is displayed while the effect of step-up 1 is being performed. 136 remains in the inoperable position. In addition, when the operation valid period is started, light is emitted in a light emission state that the chance button lamp 138 is operated, but the operation of the effect button 136 cannot be operated as described above. In this case, the chance button lamp 138 may be configured not to emit light in the light emitting mode indicating that the chance button lamp 138 is operated. For example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off.

  126 (b1) to FIG. 126 (b4) show the effect button 136 when the Echigoya character has escaped in the step-up 1 effect shown in FIGS. 126 (a1) to (a3). An operation example is shown.

  FIG. 126 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a3). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. Thus, in this effect example, when the first operation effect for the first time fails, the initial position return operation is not performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, the operation in the case where the first operation effect for the first time has failed is described. However, the first operation effect for the second time and the first operation effect for the third time may fail. Similarly, the initial position return operation may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b4), when the hold is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, the initial position return operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 125 (a2) to (a3). Done.

  In the present embodiment, after the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs the initial position returning operation, it is determined from the detection result of the effect button initial position sensor 427 whether or not the effect button 136 is in the initial position. However, when it is determined that there is no, predetermined retry control is performed. Specifically, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is not at the initial position as a result of the first initial position return operation, the CPU 404 performs the second initial position return operation. The retry operation is repeated until it is determined that the effect button 136 is in the initial position, and the effect button 136 is not in the initial position even though the initial position return operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the fifth time). If it is determined that there is a problem with the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button drive motor 434 is disabled and the effect button 136 is not driven until the power is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the production button 136 is displaced to the first position where the button protrudes and the second position where the button is recessed. The position can also be referred to as the first state and the second state. For example, the second position (second state) may be a position further protruding than the first position (first state), and it is difficult for the effect button 136 to harden and be pressed. The effect button 136 may be softened and pressed more easily, may be in a state of vibrating without being pressed, or the effect button 136 may be in the state. In the case where the movable body is accommodated, the state in which the movable body rotates or moves may be the second state.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 143.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 127 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but only the right button 137 d is operated while both the effect button 136 and the right button 137 d are requested to operate. The state of the production performed in the case is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 127 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (10), as shown in FIG. 127 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate as shown in FIG. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result effect is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Here, the right button image 137dP1 may be deleted while the right button 137d is being operated. Thereby, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time is continuously displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2. Thereafter, when the operation effective period has elapsed without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 127 (13). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 127 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). The above-described operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. An operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed. This is the same in the description so far and also in the following description.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. In addition, although the example of production shown in FIG. 128 is an example of production corresponding to FIG. 111, only the production button 136 is operated while the operations of both the production button 136 and the right button 137 d are requested. The state of the production performed in the case is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 128 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (10), as shown in FIG. 128 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result effect is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be deleted while the effect button 136 is being operated. Thereby, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time is continuously displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 128 (13). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 128 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 128 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 129 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. It is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to (7), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (7), after the effect (first effect) of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (8). In addition, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. In addition to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, the operation promotion notification image corresponds to the remaining time display bar 136P2a and the right button image 137dP1 corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 instead of the remaining time display bar 136P2. A remaining time display bar 136P2b is included. The remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 are displayed so that the meter decreases as the operation effective period elapses.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (10), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed as shown in FIG. 129 (11). When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 129 (12). In this effect example, in the operation result effect, a confirmation sound for notifying the big hit confirmation is output from the speaker 120. Here, a definite sound may not be output, or a definite sound may be output without fail. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 129 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). As described above, in this effect example, when the definite sound is output from the speaker 120, the big hit symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed more easily than when the definite sound is not output from the speaker 120.

  In this effect example, the operation result effect is performed when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. However, one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d in the operation effective period. The operation result effect may be performed also when the other button is operated within a predetermined time after the button is operated. Here, the predetermined time is preferably set to an appropriate time as an error (allowable range) of simultaneous pressing. However, in the pachinko machine 100, it is necessary to perform simultaneous operation with one hand because a game ball is fired. There are some cases, and it is preferable to adopt in such a case. In this case, an operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) described above may be performed. That is, in the operation effective period, the first operation result effect is performed by simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, and the first operation result effect is obtained by operating one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. What is comprised so that the 2nd operation result effect different from this may be included in this invention.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. 130 is an example corresponding to FIG. 129, but only the effect button 136 is operated while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested. The state of the production performed in the case is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 130 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (10), as shown in FIG. 130 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 130 (12), the operation result effect is not performed, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. , Both display modes according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be deleted while the effect button 136 is being operated. In this case, the display of the remaining time bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 may be continued. Thereby, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time display by the remaining time display bar 136P2a is continuously performed. Further, the remaining time display bar 136P2a may be deleted together with the effect button image 136P1. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 130 (13). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 130 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 130 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 131 is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 131, after the operation valid period is started, the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, but a button different from the requested button is operated. The situation is shown.

  First, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ′), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ′). The promotion notification image may be continuously displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, a type different from the operation result effect (for example, the first operation result effect) described above. The operation result effect (for example, the second operation result effect) may be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Geki Atsu” is displayed at the center of the display area, and 10 pandas are displayed around it. An operation result display including a display arranged so as to surround the character display is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″), the operation result effect described above. May be performed. That is, in this case, it can be said that the upper button 137a different from the button (right button 137d) for which an operation is instructed corresponds to a so-called hidden command (hidden button).

  In the above-described effect example, an example in which the effect button 136 and another direction key are operated has been described, but a button other than the direction key and the effect button 136 may be operated, for example, It is configured such that at least a part of the front frame door 106 can be pressed, and the first operation result effect described above is not performed when the effect button 136 and the press operation part on the front frame door 106 are operated. Alternatively, a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect may be performed, or the first operation result effect may be performed. In addition, a lever may be provided instead of the pressing operation portion on the front frame door 106, and the operation result as described above may be obtained by operating the effect button 136 and the lever. In addition to the lever, operation means capable of pushing the structure can be applied. Each of these cases can also function as a hidden button.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 132 shows another example of the effect following FIG. 111 (6). Specifically, in FIG. 111, the operation result effect described above is performed by one simultaneous pressing operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 132, the effect button 136 and the right button are displayed. An operation result effect is performed as a result of continuous hitting by simultaneous operation of the button 137d.

  After the display shown in FIG. 111 (6) is performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (1), it is urged to repeatedly strike by the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d). A simultaneous operation including the display of "Right key and chance button repeated" is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts simultaneous operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d within the effective period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that represents the remaining time of the effective period. 136P2 is included. The operation promotion notification image has the same display form as the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), but may have a different display form. For example, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are repeatedly hit. An animated display may be performed. The operation effective period in this effect example may be a period in which simultaneous pressing of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested a plurality of times.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (3), when one or more simultaneous operations are performed, the effect movable body 225 moves downward little by little as shown in FIG. 132 (4), and the effect movable body The lower part of 225 overlaps a part of the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed. It should be noted that every time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, an effect that the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed, and when the predetermined number of times (for example, five times) the simultaneous operation is performed, the effect movable body 225 may move downward. That is, an effect in which the effect movable body 225 vibrates each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously can be referred to as an example of the operation result effect. An effect in which the effect movable body 225 moves downward when simultaneous operations are performed can also be an example of an operation result effect. That is, it can also be said that an operation result effect is performed for each effect that the effect movable body 225 moves little by little by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. An effect different from the operation result effect may be performed. Further, every time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, the contents of the effect are, for example, first operation result effect> second operation result effect> third operation result effect. May be configured to change each time a simultaneous operation is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (5), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times simultaneously, the effect is movable as shown in FIG. 132 (6). The body 225 moves further downward, and about 3/4 below the effect movable body 225 overlaps the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (7), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or multiple times, as shown in FIG. 132 (8), the effect movable body 225 is displayed. Moves further downward, and the entire effect movable body 225 overlaps the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed. That is, the same effect as in FIG. 111 (12) is performed.

  In this production example, the long-press auto-strike function (described later) may be activated for the production button 136. For example, the production button 136 and the right button 137d are operated before the operation effective period starts. After that, when the operation valid period is started, the operation movable effect 225 such as the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed for the first time. The right button 137d that has not been performed may be configured such that the operation result effect is not performed unless the operation state is OFF> ON. Further, after the operation valid period is started, the operation result presentation may be performed on the condition that each button requested to operate is OFF> ON. For example, when the operation effective period is started in a state where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed unless the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated again. May be configured. Further, when the operation valid period is started in a state where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is performed every time the effect button 136 is pseudo-struck repeatedly. Also good. In addition, when the long press auto-strike function is enabled for the effect button 136, the timing at which the operation result effect is performed may be based on the timing at which the effect button 136 is subjected to a pseudo continuous operation. The timing at which the player operates the right button 137d for which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not valid may be used as a reference. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the operation result effect by arbitrarily combining these.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 133 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, the effect mode 136 is configured so that it can be set to the auto mode. When a button effect requiring operation is performed, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, the operation result effect is performed assuming that the effect button 136 is operated. That is, in this production example, while the operation of both the production button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only the right button 137d is operated, but both the production button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. It is shown that the operation result effect is being performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 133 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (10), as shown in FIG. 133 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 133 (12). Thus, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 is controlled as being operated even if it is not operated. Therefore, by operating the right button 137d, the effect button It is controlled so that an operation result effect is performed as if both 136 and the right button 137d were operated. In this example, the deterministic sound is not output, but the deterministic sound may be output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 133 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The production example shown in FIG. 134 is a production example corresponding to FIGS. 129 (7) to (15). In this production example, a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by a long press operation of the production button 136. It has a long-press automatic continuous hitting function. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer, and the repeated operation is an effect button 136. This is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In this production example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, 200 ms interval) is performed in a pseudo manner while the presentation button 136 is continuously pressed. It is configured. Further, in this effect example, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136, the long press auto-strike function is performed in order to appropriately perform the single operation with the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 134 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (7) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (3), the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 134 (5) at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (4). Is performed. However, since the timing at which the right button 137d is operated is a timing before the pseudo continuous hit operation is started, the effect button 136 is in an operation invalid state. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. Thereafter, when the pseudo continuous hit operation is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (6), the operation of the effect button 136 becomes valid, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 134 (7), an operation result effect is performed. Thus, in this effect example, since the long press auto-strike function is enabled, both buttons are enabled when the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated. It will be delayed until the timing is reached. In this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be validated when the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time after the right button 137d is operated, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 136d is not made effective at the timing when the effect button 136 is started to be pressed for a long time. You may make it delay until it becomes the timing which starts a continuous striking operation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (8), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 134 (9) to (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 134 (8) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. In addition, although the example of an effect shown in FIG. 135 is an example of an effect corresponding to FIG. 134, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is also effective in this example of an effect. In this effect example, after the effect button 136 is operated, the right button 137d is operated and both buttons are operated. However, the right button is operated before the timing when the pseudo continuous operation is started. A state in which the operation of the button 137d is released is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 135 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (7) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (3), the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 135 (5) at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (4). Is performed. However, at the timing when the right button 137d is operated, since it is a period in which the pseudo continuous hit operation is not started, the effect button 136 is in an operation invalid state. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. Thereafter, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 135 (6) before the timing at which the pseudo continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started, the effect button 136 and the right button are displayed. As shown in FIG. 135 (7), the operation result notification image is not performed and the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are not displayed. Are both displayed according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 135 (8). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 135 (9) to (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 135 (8) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 130 (13) to (15).

  136 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 136 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 133. However, in this effect example, when the auto mode is set, not only the effect button 136 but also the direction key including the right button 137d. When a button effect requiring operation of the direction key is performed, the operation result effect is performed even if the direction key is not operated, assuming that the direction key is operated. In other words, in this effect example, while both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be operated, the operation result effect is obtained even when neither the effect button 136 nor the right button 137d is operated. It shows what happens. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 136 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (9), when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (10) is reached, as shown in FIG. 136 (11), either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d In spite of being not operated, the operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 136 (12). As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are controlled as being operated without being operated, and thus the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are controlled. Even if neither of them is operated, the operation result effect is controlled so that the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously. In this example, the deterministic sound is not output, but the deterministic sound may be output. In addition, the timing at which the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated after the operation valid period is started can be set as appropriate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (13), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 136 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 136 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 137 to FIG. 138 are diagrams showing an example of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Here, FIG. 137 is another effect example continuing from FIG. 107 (e), and FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example effect shown in FIG. 137 step by step.

  FIG. 137 (a) continuing from FIG. 107 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (b), the effect button 136 is displayed in the effective period (in this effect example, it may be referred to as the second effective period) on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is started. An operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Thus, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image 136P is an example of an operation display related to the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 137 (c), the valid period is reduced. In FIG. 137 (d), the player presses the effect button 136. Here, the effect button 136 is in a normal button state. For example, the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red and no operation such as vibration is performed (second button state of the effect button 136). When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. It should be noted that even when the effect button 136 is not pressed within the effective period, the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e) may be performed, or the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e) may be performed. May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (e). This also applies to the effect for one-time operation, the effect for continuous hitting, and the effect for long press. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 functions as a second operation result display. Further, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, “operation result display” may be referred to as “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 137 (f), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol variation display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display. As described above, when the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed, the big hit symbol is more easily determined and displayed than when the operation promotion notification image 136P is not displayed. It may not be configured as such.

  In FIG. 137 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed in FIG. 137 (i). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (i) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (j) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  In FIG. 137 (k), the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, the effect (first effect) of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is then started at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously within the effective period (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as the first effective period). An operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to enter the operated state is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that represents the remaining time of the effective period. 136P2 is included. At this time, an operation waiting animation display indicating that the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is performed. At this time, the effect button image 136 </ b> P <b> 1 may not be displayed and may be a still image. In the present embodiment, when the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is oscillating is performed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is oscillating is not performed. It has become. Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), an effect button 136 (sometimes referred to as second operation means in this effect example) and a right button 137d (sometimes referred to as first operation means in this effect example). ) Is operated, as shown in FIG. 137 (o), the operation result effect shown in FIG. 137 (e) (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as the second operation result effect) Different operation result effects (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as a first operation result effect) are performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation including a display in which the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed at the center of the display area and ten pandas are arranged around the character display around the display. The result is displayed. Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), when the operation effective period is started, the effect button 136 lights in red and vibrates (first button state of the effect button 136). Thereby, the expectation to the big hit with respect to a player may be able to be raised. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 vibrates, the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (p), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 138 (q) to (r) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 138 (p) to (r) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). Here, the second operation means may be the effect button 136, the right button 137d, or another direction key. The first operation means may be the right button 137d, an effect button, or another direction key.

  In this production example, the first button state and the second button state of the production button 136 differ depending on whether or not the production button 136 vibrates. For example, the first button state and the second button state Then, you may make it differ according to the strength of vibration. For example, the effect button 136 may vibrate with strong vibration in the first button state, and the effect button 136 may vibrate with weak vibration in the second button state. Moreover, although the lighting mode of the chance button lamp 138 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, they may be different, for example, the first button state and the second button state. The button buttons may be different in emission color (for example, the first button state is a state in which the effect button 136 emits light in the first emission color, and the second button state is The effect button 136 may be in a state of emitting light in the second emission color.) Although the same emission color is used, the brightness may be different (for example, the first button state is the effect button 136). Is a state in which light is emitted at the first luminance, and the second button state may be a state in which the effect button 136 emits light at a second luminance lower (higher) than the first luminance). So that the number of LEDs (For example, the first button state is a state in which the light emission number of the LEDs constituting the chance button lamp 138 is the first number, and the second button state is an LED constituting the chance button lamp 138. May be in a state where the number of emitted light is a second number that is smaller (larger) than the first number. Further, the form of the effect button 136 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, but may be different. For example, in the second button state, the first button state is the first button state. The form which becomes the position which the main body of the production | presentation button 136 protruded with respect to the button state may be sufficient, and the form which becomes a depressed position may be sufficient. In other words, the first button state and the second button state are included in the present invention as long as at least a part of the states is configured to be different.

  In addition, the state of the effect button 136 before the start of the first effective period may be the same, or the state of the effect button 136 may change in a period other than the first effective period, For example, it may function as a notice effect or a prefetch notice when the state of the effect button 136 changes.

  Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is configured to be able to vibrate, but for example, at least a part of the effect button 136 may be configured to be rotatable, for example, a portion where the effect button 136 is directly operated. The button body may be rotated, the body of the production button 136 is transparent and the inside can be visually recognized, and a decorative member such as a light emitter is rotatably provided inside the body of the production button 136. Also good. Further, a cylindrical case body that accommodates and supports the button main body of the effect button 136 and is attached to the door 108 with a ball storage tray may be configured to be rotatable. The effect button 136 configured in this manner may be rotated in the first button state, non-rotated in the second button state, or in the first button state. The rotation state may be at the first rotation speed, and in the second button state, the rotation state may be at the second rotation speed that is slower (faster) than the first rotation speed.

  Thus, in this production example, any form can be applied as long as the first button state and the second button state are different.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 139 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, when the operation valid period is started, the direction key vibrates. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 139 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (7), after the simultaneous operation effect (first effect) of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 139 (8). In addition, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (10), as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 139 (12). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the direction key vibrates when the operation effective period starts. Thereby, the expectation to the big hit with respect to a player may be able to be raised. In addition to the direction key, the effect button 136 may be vibrated. In the present embodiment, when the direction key (right button 137d) vibrates, the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the direction key (right button 137d) does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 139 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 139 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. 140 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, when the operation valid period is started, the chance button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 blinks in red. It shows how it emits light.

  FIG. 140 (1) corresponds to FIG. 129 (1), and displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. As shown in FIG. 140 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In the present embodiment, a state in which the reach is performed by “decoration 7” is shown, and three decorative symbols are also displayed in the lower left of the display screen. These three decorative symbols, for example, are stopped and displayed at the same time in combination of symbols corresponding to the display results of Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 140 (2), when the right button 137d is operated, a symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. Further, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in other light emission modes (for example, white color). Similarly, when the left button 137c is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. The symbol variation mid-use setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol variation setting screen functions as an example of a volume setting display. This setting screen for changing symbols is arranged and displayed in a layer in front of the layer on which the effect display is performed. Therefore, while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the effect display is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels.

  If the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 140 (4) while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 140 (5). Accordingly, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth level. At this time, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The effect button 136 may be lit in red, or may be always lit in blue and not necessarily lit in red. In addition, the light may be emitted in another light emission mode (for example, a white light-up mode). In the present embodiment, the volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in a state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third level, the volume decreases by one level, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG is the second level. It will change to the display which shows. When the right button 137d (the left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto repeat function is activated during the long pressing time, and the volume increases by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured (to decrease), or the volume may not be increased (not decreased) as long as the operation is not performed once so that the auto repeat function is not activated.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to (10) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (6) to (10), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (7), after the production of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) (first production) is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (8). In addition, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (10), as shown in FIG. 140 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 140 (12). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 140 (11), when the operation effective period starts, the effect button 136 emits light in a flashing manner in red. Thereby, the expectation to the big hit with respect to a player may be able to be raised. Note that the direction key (right button 137d) together with the effect button may be caused to emit light in a flashing manner in red. Further, when the operation effective period is started, the effect button 136 may be allowed to emit light in a manner that blinks in red, or may emit light in another light emission manner (for example, a manner that lights in red). There may be. In addition, when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 may not always emit blue light. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 emits light in a flashing manner in red, the big hit symbol is more easily determined and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not emit light in a blinking manner in red. . Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (13), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 140 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 140 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 141 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129, but is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137 d. In the operation promotion notification image, the operation of only the effect button 136 is promoted, and the right button 137d is not notified of the operation. That is, in this effect example, at least some of the buttons that require operation (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) are not notified to operate, and the operation of the right button 137d functions as a hidden command. It shows that Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 141 (1) to (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (5), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 141 (6) shows a state in which the duel scene animation continues. In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (7), the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. However, as shown in FIG. 141 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 requires the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, but only “press the chance button” and the operation of the effect button 136. Is displayed as if requesting. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 141 (8), the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1, and the right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display corresponding to the right button image 136dP1. Bar 136P2b is not included. Therefore, if it is a normal player, it is expected that a predetermined operation result effect will be performed by operating only the effect button 136. For example, a player who obtains information by looking at the Internet or a strategy magazine, etc. If so, it may be expected that a special operation result effect is performed by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (10), as shown in FIG. 141 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 141 (12). In this effect example, in the operation result effect, a confirmation sound for notifying the big hit confirmation is output from the speaker 120. If only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, only the effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 141 (12), for example, the drop of the effect movable body 225 is performed, and the definite sound is generated. An effect that is not output may be performed. Further, in the operation effective period, the operation result effect may not be performed and the operation promotion notification image may be continuously displayed until both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously (that is, the display) At least one of the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b being displayed may not be deleted). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 141 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  142 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 142 (6) continuing from FIG. 141 (5) shows a state in which the duel scene animation continues. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (7), the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. However, as shown in FIG. 142 (7), in this effect, the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, but unlike the effect shown in FIG. 141 (7), the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, a display requesting button operation is not performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 142 (8), the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the remaining time display bar 136P2, and does not include the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Therefore, a normal player who sees this may be able to recognize that the period in which something should be done has started, and may have a sense of expectation in the subsequent development of the production. On the other hand, for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet, a strategy magazine, or the like can expect a special operation result effect to be performed by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136. There is a case. Further, the display position of the remaining time display bar may be displayed at the same position as the display position when the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, for example, so that the player thinks that there is something, The remaining time display bar may be conspicuous as a position other than the button image (for example, the center of the display screen).

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (10), as shown in FIG. 142 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 142 (12). In this effect example, in the operation result effect, a confirmation sound for notifying the big hit confirmation is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, only the effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 142 (12), for example, the drop of the effect movable body 225 is performed, and the definite sound is generated. An effect that is not output may be performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (13), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 142 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 142 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 142.

  FIGS. 143 (8A) to 10 (A) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). FIGS. 143 (8A) to 10 (A) show how the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The operation promotion notification image displayed here is different from FIGS. 142 (8) to (10), and includes only the remaining time display bars (136P2a, 136P2b) corresponding to the number of buttons that require the operation. The effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are not included. As described above, the buttons that require operation (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) are hidden buttons, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b corresponding to the hidden buttons are displayed, so that how many buttons are operated. You may be able to hint to the player what to do.

  FIGS. 143 (8B) to (10B) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). FIGS. 143 (8B) to 10 (B) show how the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The operation promotion notification image displayed here is different from FIGS. 142 (8) to (10), and does not include any button image or remaining time display bar. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image is not displayed. Thus, there are cases where an effect that is a complete hidden command can be performed by not displaying any of the buttons (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) that require an operation and the remaining time display bar. In this production example, the animation of the duel scene animation is lightened, and therefore it may be possible to indicate to the player that the hidden command is being received. Here, the animation display of the duel scene may not be lightened.

  In the present embodiment, an example of an effect when a plurality of buttons are operated at the same time has been described. However, for example, a touch panel is provided and applied to a button and a touch panel operated simultaneously, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor. And may be applied to one that operates a button and a non-contact sensor at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the same button (the effect button 136) is used for the button for performing the normal button operation and the button for performing the long press automatic continuous hitting, but the button for performing the normal button operation is used. A mode in which an effect button corresponding to the operation method is provided, such as providing a button for performing long press automatic continuous hitting, may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a single operation effect, an effect may be performed in which a plurality of buttons are operated at preset timings. Specifically, for example, an effect button image 136P1, a right button image 137dP1, and a remaining time display bar 136P2 are displayed as operation promotion notification images, and an icon of the effect button 136 is displayed at a predetermined position on the gauge of the remaining time display bar 136P2. An icon of the right button 137d may be displayed to indicate the operation timing of each button, and when each button is operated at an appropriate timing, such an effect that an operation result effect is performed may be performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, you may make it perform the production which combined long press operation and 1 time operation. For example, a configuration may be provided in which an operation result effect is performed by pressing and holding the left button 137c to increase the gauge and operating the effect button 136 in that state. In this case, the production effect may be further improved if the production content varies according to the gauge amount at the time when the production button 136 is operated. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that combines a continuous hit operation or a long press automatic continuous hit and a single operation, or an effect that combines a continuous hit operation or a long press automatic continuous hit and a long press operation. .

  Moreover, you may make it perform long press simultaneous operation effect that operation result effect is performed by performing long press operation with each of two or more buttons, for example, when long press simultaneous operation effect is started, After a display that prompts the user to simultaneously press and hold both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed, a display that prompts the user to release the long-pressed button is displayed. As a result, when the long-press simultaneous operation effect is successful, an operation result effect indicating that the operation has been successful is performed. Here, the degree of change in the production (for example, the amount of increase in gauge, etc.) differs between when one of the two buttons requested to be operated is pressed and when both are pressed for a long time. May be. Furthermore, the degree of change in the production may be different depending on whether or not only one button is pressed for a long time and when only the other button is pressed for a long time. Further, the production may not be changed unless both buttons are pressed for a long time. Also, when releasing two long-pressed buttons, make sure that the displayed content is different, for example, if you release only one of the two buttons or if you release both, the effects on the operation result effect will be different. Alternatively, the operation result effect may not be performed when only one of the two buttons is released, and the operation result effect may be performed when both of the two buttons are released.

  Further, a configuration may be provided in which an operation result effect is performed by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing automatic continuous hitting with each of two or more buttons.

  In the present embodiment, the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided one by one for each function, but two or more buttons having the same function are provided. It may be configured to be applicable to the embodiment. For example, a configuration in which two effect buttons are provided and three upper buttons 137a are provided, and an effect is provided by simultaneously operating two effect buttons and one or more upper buttons. You may prepare. In addition to the buttons, a production lever that simulates a production lever, a car handle, a motorcycle handle, etc. may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiments. You may provide the structure which produces an effect by operating simultaneously the button of. Alternatively, an effect dial such as a jog dial may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, the effect is performed by simultaneously operating the effect dial and other buttons. Such a configuration may be provided. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of effect buttons 136 having the same function but different uses may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, a first effect button used in a normal effect and a second effect button used when a special effect is being performed are provided, and the first effect button is operated while operating the second effect button. You may provide the structure which performs the production which raises a feeling of expectation further by operating one production button.

  In the present embodiment, the eco mode (power saving mode) may be set. In the eco mode, for example, when a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the production button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed, the setting screen is displayed (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation). On the screen, setting can be made by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. At this time, every time the direction key or the determination button 137e is operated, notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Further, when the eco mode is set, notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Here, the eco mode is, for example, a decoration for the purpose of reducing power consumption when the symbol variation display is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the customer waiting demonstration display is started. In this mode, the driving of one or a plurality of driving devices is limited or stopped, such as reducing the brightness of the backlight of the symbol display device 208, turning off the various lamps 418, or turning off the output from the speaker 120. When the eco mode is set, the light emission brightness and volume of the various lamps 418 during the game may be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, an original (Daitomo) mode may be set. In the original mode, for example, when a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed, the setting screen is displayed (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation). On the screen, setting can be made by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. Note that an original mode selection switch that switches between enabling and disabling the original mode may be provided in the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIGS. 4 and 77. The original mode selection switch is operated by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100 when the pachinko machine 100 is shipped from the factory, or operated by a store clerk of the store where the pachinko machine is installed. The original mode selection switch may be disabled after shipment by, for example, caulking a portion of the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 where the original mode selection switch is provided at the time of shipment. That is, since the original mode selection switch cannot be operated by the player, it is preferable that the original mode selection switch is configured to be operated only by a limited number of people such as a manufacturer's person or a store clerk.

  In the original mode, the gaming machine is capable of setting the original mode, and history information of the result of playing in the state set in the original mode is stored in the gaming machine. At the game stand, various privileges (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate and an effect indicating information related to the profit of the game) according to the history information are given. When the game in which the original mode is set is to be ended, individual setting information, which is individual player information, including history information stored in the game table is input to the server. Each time a game in which the original mode is set is finished, individual setting information including new history information reflecting the history of the game is issued from the gaming table. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. When the individual setting information stored in the server is input to the game machine when the next game is played, a privilege according to the history information included in the input individual setting information is also provided at the next game. This individual setting information is included in an encrypted password having a predetermined number of digits, and is exchanged between the game console-player (external device apparatus) -server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine stores a corresponding model code. In specifications where history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes. In specifications where history information can be used only between the same models, there is only one corresponding model code. .

  In the original mode, when inputting a password to store the player's history information in the pachinko machine 100, for example, in a screen for setting the original mode, a predetermined direction key (for example, the right button 137d) is pressed. By operating, it is possible to transition to the password input screen. On the password input screen, for example, while viewing the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been transmitted, operate the direction key to move to the position of the desired character, and press the effect button 136, the decision button 137e, etc. By doing so, the input character is determined. After the password input of a predetermined number of characters (for example, five characters) is completed, when a predetermined operation (for example, an input completion operation using the direction key and the enter button 137e) is performed, the input password is stored in the pachinko machine 100. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  When the player history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 is initialized as described above, for example, a predetermined direction key (for example, the left button 137c) is displayed on the screen for setting the original mode. It may be possible to perform this by operating. In this case, a confirmation message as to whether or not the player's history information may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 may be displayed and a warning message may be displayed for initialization.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described auto mode function may be configured to be set to ON or OFF. The auto mode is set, for example, by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, an operation of the production button 136 in a waiting state for a customer), to shift to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), On this setting screen, setting can be performed by appropriately operating the direction key and the determination button 137e. In addition, for example, a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the determination button 137e in the waiting state for a customer) may be performed, or the setting may be performed by a direction key other than the determination button 137e. It may be settable. For example, the auto mode function may be switched between the ON state and the OFF state each time the enter button 137e is operated in the customer waiting state.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, you may be comprised so that time setting can be performed. The time setting is performed, for example, by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state), and the setting screen is moved (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation). On the screen, setting can be made by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. When the screen shifts to the time setting screen as described above, for example, the time can be changed by operating a direction key.

  Further, in this embodiment, only the effect button 136 may be activated by the long press automatic repetitive function, or each button (up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, and right button 137d) constituting the direction key together with the effect button 136. , The determination button 137e, the cancel button 317f), or the two or more buttons may be effective for the long press auto-strike function.

  In the present embodiment, the setting operation (for example, the first setting operation) is performed by operating one button (for example, the right button 137d) constituting the direction key. A setting operation (for example, a second setting operation) different from the first setting operation may be configured by simultaneous operation of two buttons (for example, the left button 137c and the right button 137d). The password may be selected by operating the button 137c, and the input password may be all cleared by simultaneous operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, the setting operation may be configured by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the direction key.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the long press auto repetitive function and the auto mode are disabled only when a special effect such as a button effect requesting simultaneous pressing of two or more buttons is performed. May be. Further, even when the hidden command can be received, the automatic continuous hitting function and the auto mode may be disabled. According to this, the presence of the hidden command may be kept secret from the normal player. Further, the long-press auto-strike function or the auto mode may be enabled even when the hidden command can be received. According to this, it may be possible to notify the normal player of the presence of the hidden command.

  In the present embodiment, the operation result effect is described as being performed during the execution of the reach effect, but the symbol variation display before the reach effect is started may be performed, or the reach effect is not performed. The symbol variation display may be displayed, the re-drawing effect that is performed after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol may be executed, the decorative lottery promotion promotion lottery of the decorative symbol during the big hit, or the probability variation lottery The production may be in progress, or may be applied to various notifications or effects such as notification of a pre-reading notice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, BGM may be selected (song selection). For example, on a setting screen that can be shifted while waiting for a customer, a song selection is performed by using a direction key or an effect button 136. It may be configured to be able to. The song selection may be changed not only during the customer waiting but also during, for example, the big hit start effect or during the big hit game, and may be configured so that the song can be selected by the direction key or the effect button 136. In this case, for example, the display of the name of the song that is changed by operating the direction key and the notification that the song selection has been confirmed by the operation of the effect button 136 can be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. There is a case.

In the above description,
“First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e,
A second operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, a production button 136 or the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a volume setting display [for example, a symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (3), a volume setting screen shown in FIG. 115 (e), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 111 (12), FIG. 112 (c5), FIG. 114 (i), etc.]
The volume setting display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the right button is displayed during the symbol variation display. When 137d is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3)],
The first operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, in FIG. 111 (11) As shown, when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208, an effect display that the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the display contents when the first operating means is operated and when the plurality of operating means are operated can be made different, so that the display variations according to the operation can be increased, and the player You may be able to improve your interests.

  Here, the first operating means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the first operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the second operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the second operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may be capable of displaying other than the volume setting display and the first operation result display. . The display means may always display the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may not display the volume setting display and the first operation result display.

  In addition, the volume setting display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the first operation means, or in response to things other than the operation of the first operation means. May be displayed. Further, the volume setting display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means, or may not be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means. May be.

  The first operation result display may be displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation result may be displayed. There may be a case where the message is displayed in response to something other than the operation of both the means and the second operation means. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. There may be a case where it is not displayed in response to the operation of both of the two operation means.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the volume setting display, brightness setting display, display setting display on display means (decorative symbol display device 208, liquid crystal display device, etc.), and character selection for selecting a character to appear in the game. Display, music selection display for selecting BGM, mode selection display for selecting the production mode during the game, and user mode display for entering a password etc. to take over the player's game history can be displayed It may be configured. That is, the volume setting display can be said to be an example of an effect unit that can set a setting value by a setting operation.

  Here, the types of display settings of the display means include, for example, LCD backlight brightness adjustment, color temperature adjustment, black level adjustment (brightness adjustment of black part of video), white level adjustment (video) Brightness adjustment of white portion), color density adjustment, hue adjustment, sharpness (image outline) adjustment, resolution adjustment, and the like. In addition, when the sound output means is configured to include a high-pitched speaker and a low-pitched speaker, the volume adjustment for only the low sound, the volume adjustment for only the high sound, and the balance adjustment for the high and low sounds are also included in the settings for the sound output means. May be.

  Moreover, the display performed according to the operation of the first operation means is not limited to the setting display, but may be an effect display. For example, when two treasure chests are displayed side by side, if the right button 137d is operated, the right treasure chest opens to acquire an item, or the left button 137c is selected when selecting one of the two left and right routes. When operated, it is also possible to perform an effect display in which the left route is selected.

Further, in the period in which the “first effect [for example, the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 111 (6) to FIG. [For example, in response to the operation of both the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the decision button 137e, etc.] and the second operation means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.] The first operation result display is configured to be displayed [for example, in the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 111 (6) to (12), the effect button 136 and When the right button 137d is operated at the same time, an effect display as shown in FIG.
During the period in which the first effect is performed, the volume setting display is not displayed even when the first operation means is operated [for example, the simultaneous operation effect shown in FIG. 111 (6). When is started, the volume setting setting is prohibited, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also described.

  According to this gaming machine, since the volume setting display is not displayed even if the second operation means is operated during the operation of the first operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed, the first effect is performed. In some cases, the player can prevent the player from unintentionally displaying the volume adjustment display and concentrate on the first effect.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the period during which the first effect is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means in a period other than the period in which the first effect is performed. The first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed. In the period during which the first performance is performed, the first operation unit and the second operation unit may not be displayed in response to the operation.

  The volume setting display may not be displayed only when the first operating means is operated during the period during which the first effect is performed, or during the period during which the first effect is performed. It may not always be displayed when one operating means is operated.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second operation result display [for example, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j)],
The second operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (g) to FIG. 107 (j). , A reach state entry preview image 2071 may be displayed when the production button 135 is pressed during the operation valid period]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means, or other than the operation of the second operation means. It may be displayed according to the above. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means, or is not displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means. There may be cases.

In addition, during the period in which “the second effect [for example, the effect of displaying the operation promotion notification image 136P shown in FIG. 107 (g) to FIG. The second operation result display is configured to be displayed in response to the operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect may be displayed. It may be displayed in response to a matter other than the operation of the second operation means during the period when the operation is performed. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect is displayed. In the period to be performed, there may be a case where it is not displayed according to the operation of the second operation means.

  It should be noted that the second operation result display may be displayed when the first operation means is operated in addition to the second operation means in the period during which the second performance is performed, A display different from the result display (for example, a back button display) may be displayed.

  Further, the second operation result display may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means during a period other than the period during which the second effect is performed, An operation result display different from the result display may be displayed.

In addition, in the period in which the second performance is performed, the first operation result display is not displayed even if both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to 116 (g), when an effect for operating the effect button 136 is performed, the operation result is obtained even if the effect button 136 and the right button 137 d are operated simultaneously. No production or volume change, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed even if both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated during the period in which the second effect is performed. The first operation result display may be displayed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed. There may be cases.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first operation display,
The first operation display is a display relating to operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, the chance button and the right key shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (10) Etc.]
The first operation result display is a display that is displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display may be displayed only until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may be displayed other than until both of the operating means are operated. Further, the first operation result display may be displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. There may be cases where it is not displayed until both means are operated.

  The first operation display is displayed during the first presentation, but the first operation display may not be displayed during the second presentation. In this case, when there is an operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, a predetermined operation result effect (for example, a back button effect) may be performed.

  In addition, during the first production, the first operation display may be performed. For example, in the tutorial production performed during the symbol variation display, “If you press the chance button and the right key, The first operation display may be performed at a timing completely different from the timing at which the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated. Further, in this tutorial effect, a display explaining the period during which the back button effect is executed and the operation method of the operation means at that time may be performed.

In addition, “the first operation display is a display that prompts the user to operate both the first operation unit and the second operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, a “door body [for example, front frame door 106 etc.] is provided,
The door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means,
The player can operate the first operating means and the second operating means at the same time with one hand [for example, a ball provided on the front frame door 106 as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with a storage tray so that the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since there are two operation means at positions that are easy to operate even when performing a launch operation, simultaneous operation of both operation means can be easily performed with one hand, and familiarity with the operation of the operation means. It may be easier for non-players to participate.

  Here, the door body may be provided with only the first operation means and the second operation means, or may be provided with other than the first operation means and the second operation means. Good. Further, the door body may be provided with the first operating means and the second operating means without fail, or the first operating means and the second operating means may not be provided. Good.

  In addition to the first operating means and the second operating means, there may be one that allows the player to operate simultaneously with one hand.

Further, the second operating means is an operating means having a size larger than that of the first operating means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In other words, the second operating means can be said to be an operating means having a wider surface that can be operated than the first operating means.

  The first operating means may be smaller than the second operating means, and the first operating means and the second operating means may be the same size.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the first operation unit when the first operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 400 As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control in accordance with the operation of each button constituting the operation key unit 137],
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the second operation unit when the second operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 90. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs a control according to the operation button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means. If there is, control other than the control related to the operation of the first operation means may be executable. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the first operation means may not be executed.

  Further, the production control means may be capable of executing only control related to the operation of the second operation means when the operation of the second operation means is performed, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. If there is, control other than the control related to the operation of the second operating means may be executable. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the operation of the second operation means when the operation of the second operation means is performed, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the second operation means may not be executed.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means that can be operated by the player [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
Drive means for driving the operation means [for example, an effect button drive motor 434 and the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
The driving means moves the operating means to a first position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3)] and a second position [for example, an inoperable position shown in FIG. 125 (a1). Etc.], and can be displaced between
One of the plurality of types of display is a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display [eg, operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 125 (b3)]”).
When the operation means is at a position different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed, the operation means may be displaced to the first position. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b2) to (b3), when the effect button 136 is in a position different from the operable position (initial position), an initial position return operation is performed to perform an operation promotion notification image. The production button 136 is returned to the operable position before is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game stand, a game stand having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it is possible in advance that the operation valid period of the operation means is started by the movable means being the second state being transformed into the first state before the operation display is displayed. The player may be able to grasp.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the driving means may be capable of driving only the operating means, or may be capable of driving other than the operating means. Further, the drive means may necessarily drive the operation means, or may not drive the operation means.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the operation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the operation display. The display means may always display the operation display, or may not display the operation display.

  The driving means may be capable of displacing the operating means only between the first position and the second position, or the operating means may be moved between the first position and the second position. It may be possible to displace other than between. Further, the driving means may be one that necessarily displaces the operating means between the first position and the second position, or the operating means is displaced between the first position and the second position. It may not be allowed.

  The operation means may be configured to be displaced to the first position only when the operation means is different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed. The timing before the display is displayed may be configured to be displaced to the first position even when the operation means is different from the first position. In addition, the operation means may be configured to always be displaced to the first position when the operation means is different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed. There may be a case where the operation means is not displaced to the first position when the operation means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation is performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a first continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 1 shown in FIG. 126 (a1) to FIG. 126 (a3)],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b1) to FIG. 125 (b3), etc.]
In one symbol variation display, both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display may be displayed,
The second continuous effect display is a display displayed after the first continuous effect display,
The operation display is a display that is displayed during a period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 126 (a3), an operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of step-up 1. Etc.],
The operation display is a display that is displayed during a period in which the second continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 125 (b3), an operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of step-up 2. Etc.],
When the operation means is at the second position at a timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, the operation means is the first position. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b1) to (b3), the operation promotion notification image is displayed after the effect of step-up 2 is started, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b1) to (b3). The production button 136 is returned to the initial position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to grasp in advance that the second operation display is displayed in the second continuous effect display.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is known in advance by the displacement state of the operation means that the second of the continuous effect display is displayed, so that the player may have a sense of expectation for the change. .

  Here, the display means may be configured to display only both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or other than both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. Also, it may be configured to be displayable. The display means may be configured to display both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or at least one of the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. Either of them may not be displayed.

  Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is displayed only after the first continuous effect display, or may be displayed after a display other than the first continuous effect display. Also good. Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is always displayed after the first continuous effect display, or may not be displayed after the first continuous effect display.

  Further, the operation display may be displayed only during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. There may be. In addition, the operation display may be always displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may not be displayed in the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. Also good.

  Further, the operation means is displaced to the first position only when the operation means is at the second position at a timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started. In addition to the case where the operation means is at the second position at the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, It may be configured to be displaced to one position. In addition, the operation means is always displaced to the first position when the operation means is at the second position at the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started. In the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, the first operation is performed when the operation means is at the second position. The position may not be displaced.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The first position is an initial position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3), etc.]
The production control means is a means capable of executing control for displacing the operation means to the first position (hereinafter referred to as “initial position return control”),
The effect control means is means capable of executing the initial position return control when the operation means is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started [for example, FIG. As shown in (b2) to (b3) of the same figure, an initial position return control is performed when the effect button 136 is not in the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, by performing the initial position return operation for “movable means not in the initial position” before the operation reception period starts, it is possible to give a misunderstanding that the movable means is not in the initial position There are cases where it can be prevented.

  Moreover, according to this game machine, since the production control means executes the initial position return control, the control burden on the main control unit may be able to be reduced.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the initial position return control, or may be capable of executing control other than the initial position return control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the initial position return control or may not execute the initial position return control.

  The production control means may be capable of executing the initial position return control only when the operation means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. It may be possible to execute the initial position return control other than the case where the operating means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the display is started.

In addition, “providing detection means [for example, production button initial position sensor 427] that can detect that the operation means is the first position,
The production control means can execute the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started. Means
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to accurately grasp that the operating means is not at the first position.

  Here, the detecting means may be capable of detecting only that the operating means is at the first position, or may be capable of detecting other than the first position. Further, the detecting means may always detect that the operating means is at the first position, or may not detect that the operating means is at the first position.

  The effect control means can execute the initial position return control only when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. The initial position return control can be executed in addition to the case where the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. There may be. The effect control means always executes the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. Alternatively, the initial position return control may not be executed when the detection unit detects that the operation unit is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. .

In addition, the production control means is means capable of executing retry control,
The retry control is control for executing the initial position return control again when it is determined that the operating means is not in the first position even if the initial position return control is executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the retry control, or may be executable in addition to the retry control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the retry control or may not execute the retry control.

In addition, “the first position is a position at which the player can operate the operation means [for example, an operable position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first position may be a position where only the player can operate the operation means, or may be a position where the operation means can be operated by a player other than the player. Further, the first position may be a position where the player always operates the operation means, or the player may not operate the operation means.

In addition, “the second position [for example, inoperable position, etc.] is a position in which the player cannot operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the second position is a position where the player can operate the operation means, and may be a position different from the first position.

Further, “When the symbol variation display is started, when the operation means is at a position different from the first position [for example, an inoperable position, etc.], the operation means is displaced to the first position. Configured as
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the operation means is returned to the initial position when performing the effect of returning the operation means to the initial position by performing the operation of returning the operation means to the initial position at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be easier to get started.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a state where the operating means is not in the initial position from being continued in a plurality of symbol variation displays, and to make it easier for a game clerk to determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred. There is.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, when the initial position return operation is performed at the start of symbol variation, when operating in a range that overlaps the range of rotation of the other effect movable body, contact with the other effect movable body is performed. There are cases where it can be easily prevented.

In addition, “the operation display is a display for urging the operation of the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image or the like shown in FIG. 125 (b3)”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means that can be operated by the player [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting shown in FIG. 120 (g). Production display etc. that is reduced]
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in a first operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for repeated hits, etc.]
The first operation effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective,
From the timing when the long press operation is started in the first operation effective period (hereinafter referred to as “first timing [for example, timing A1 shown in FIG. 117 (B)]”). The first effect display may be displayed in response to the long press operation being performed for a first time [for example, a time T1 until a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted]. ,
In response to the long pressing operation being performed for a second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period, the first effect display may be displayed,
The second timing is a timing at which the long press operation has been performed for the first time after the first timing has been reached,
The first time and the second time are different,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the timing at which the first effect display is displayed can be made different between the time from the timing at which the long press operation is started and the time from the timing at which the time has elapsed, There are cases where the timing at which the performance is displayed does not become monotonous and the player can be entertained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the first operation effective period, or may be displayed outside the first operation effective period. The first effect display may be displayed without fail during the first operation effective period, or may not be displayed during the first operation effective period.

In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed only when the long press operation by the operation unit is continued for the first time from the first timing. In addition, it may be configured to be displayed in response to a thing other than that the long pressing operation by the operating means has been performed for the first time from the first timing, The one effect display may be configured to be always displayed in response to a long press operation performed by the operation means from the first timing and performed for the first time. According to the fact that the long press operation by the operation means has been performed for a first time from one timing, it may be configured not to be displayed,
In addition, the first effect display is displayed only when the long press operation has been performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period and is performed for the second time. There may be cases where there is a case where the first effect display is performed in response to the fact that the long press operation is continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. May be displayed. In addition, the first effect display is always displayed in accordance with the fact that the long press operation has been performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. In some cases, the first effect display may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. There may be.

  Also, the first time and the second time may be the same or different, the first time may be longer, and the second time is longer. Also good.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first result display [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 119 (n) or FIG. 120 (n)],
The first result display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (n) As described above, by operating the effect button 136 repeatedly, an operation result effect in which a bancho character throws a panda is displayed]
The first result display is a display that may be displayed even when the long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started [for example, FIG. 120 (n) As shown in FIG. 6, an operation result effect in which the chief character throws a panda away is also displayed by long pressing the effect button 136],
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means in the first operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first result display may be displayed even if a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation is performed, so that the player may be able to arbitrarily select an operation method. . In other words, a player who knows that the first result display is displayed even if the user makes a long-press operation or a long-press operation can enjoy the long-press operation. Since a player who does not have a continuous hit operation, a player who knows this may be able to do a little easier. That is, since there is an element that plays a game, participation in the game may be promoted.

  Here, the first result display may be displayed only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. It may be displayed even when the operation means is not repeatedly hit after the effective period starts. The first result display may be always displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period starts. In some cases, it may not be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit.

  Further, the first result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. It may be displayed even when a long press operation is performed after the effective period is started. In addition, the first result display may be displayed when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period may be displayed. It may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed after starting.

  In addition, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means may be displayed in the first operation effective period. There may be a case where it is displayed in response to an operation other than the operation. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means is displayed in the first operation effective period. It may not be displayed depending on the operation.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a continuous hit operation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (c) to FIG. Is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that the game will be a big hit, and prompting the player to defeat all the pandas within the effective operation period by hitting the production button 136 repeatedly. A series of displays in which an operation promotion notification image is displayed],
The continuous hit operation display is a display that prompts to repeatedly hit the operation means,
The first operation effective period is configured to start after the continuous hit operation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where it can be easily recognized that a continuous hitting operation display is performed to the player.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, a display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display of Tono-sama shown in FIG. ],
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in a second operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for long press, etc.]
The second operation effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective,
The second operation effective period is a period different from the first operation effective period,
The long-pressing operation continues from the timing (hereinafter referred to as “third timing”) when the long-pressing operation is started in the second operation effective period for a third time [for example, liquid crystal for long-pressing Depending on what has been done, the second effect display may be displayed.
The second effect display is a display that is not displayed unless the long press operation is continued for the third time after the third timing [for example, shown in FIG. 121 (g). The display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display of Tono-sama is enlarged is not displayed until the time T3 has passed since the operation of the effect button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even when the same long press operation is performed, the timing at which the effect display is displayed differs depending on the effect, so there may be variations in the display timing of the effect display, which may entertain the player is there.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, whether the player who is used to the game displays the first effect display or the second effect display depending on the time until the effect display is displayed. May be able to grasp and enjoy the operation.

  Here, the second effect display may be a display that may be displayed only in the second operation effective period, or may be displayed in a period other than the second operation effective period. Good. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed during the second operation effective period, or may not be displayed during the second operation effective period.

  Further, the second operation effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the operation unit is effective, or may be a period in which the operation other than the operation of the operation unit is effective. Further, it may be a period during which the operation of the operation means is always valid, or the operation of the operation means may not be valid.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only in response to the long press operation being performed for the third time from the third timing, It may be displayed in response to things other than that the long press operation has been performed for the third time from the above timing. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed according to the fact that the long press operation has been performed for the third time from the third timing, or from the third timing. The display may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being performed for the third time.

“One of the plural types of displays is a long press operation display [for example, an operation promotion notification for promoting a long press operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to (h)”. Image display etc.],
The long press operation display is a display that prompts the user to press and hold the operation means.
The second operation effective period is configured to start after the long press operation display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 121 (c) to FIG. The operational validity period has started after the image is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the second operation valid period is started after the long press operation display is seen, there may be a sufficient period of time during which the long press operation can be performed.

  Here, the second operation valid period may be configured to be able to start only after the long press operation display is started, or configured to be able to start other than after the long press operation display is started. May be. Further, the second operation valid period may be configured to always start after the long press operation display is started, or may not start after the long press operation display is started.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second result display [for example, an operation result effect by a long press operation, etc.]
The second result display is a display that may be displayed when the long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started. It may be displayed in addition to the case where the long press operation is performed after the operation valid period is started. Further, the second result display may be always displayed when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started, or the second operation effective period is displayed. It may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed after starting.

In addition, the first time [for example, time T1 until transmission of a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hit] after the first timing [for example, the timing of A1 in FIG. In response to the operation means being operated again before the passage of time, the first effect display [e.g., in the effect for repeated hits shown in FIG. Indication display etc. that the number of remaining pandas should decrease] may be displayed,
The first effect display is configured not to be displayed until the first time elapses while the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. A game table that features ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. Alternatively, it may be displayed other than when the operation means is operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. In addition, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. There may be a case where the display is not performed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing.

  Here, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed until only the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. Further, it may be configured not to be displayed even when a time other than the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed whenever the first time elapses while the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. There may be a case where the display is not performed after the first time has elapsed in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control means is means capable of executing control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the control burden on the main control unit may be reduced.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation, or may execute other than the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation. It may be a thing. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation, or may not execute control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation. Also good.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first operation effective period is a period started during display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

In addition, 'the first time is longer than the second time,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the first effect display from being displayed unintentionally.

  The first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time may be the same.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e,
A second operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, a production button 136 or the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a volume setting display [for example, a volume gauge VG shown in FIG. 111 (3) or FIG. 115 (e)],
One of the plural types of displays is an operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 111 (12), FIG. 112 (c5), FIG. 114 (i), etc.]
A volume setting operation by the first operation means [for example, a volume setting operation by the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 111 (4) and FIG. 115 (f), etc.] is possible.
While the volume setting display is displayed, the volume setting operation is performed so that the display mode of the volume setting display changes [for example, FIG. 111 (3) to FIG. If the right button 137d is operated while the volume gauge VG in the third stage display mode is being displayed as shown in 115 (e) to (g), the volume gauge VG is changed from the third stage display mode. Change to the display mode of the fourth stage, etc.]
In the first effective period, the operation result display is configured to be displayed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated [for example, When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated as shown in FIG. 111 (11), the effect movable body 225 displays the decoration symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 111 (12). In addition to moving to the front side of the screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.]
The first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are valid [for example, the right button 137d at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9). A period in which the operation and the operation of the effect button 136 are enabled (operation effective period) is started, or a period in which the operation of both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 is enabled (operation effective period). Is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a display whose display mode changes with the passage of the first effective period (hereinafter referred to as“ first effective period display [for example, FIG. 111 (8) To the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 10 (10) and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b shown in FIG. 112 (b1)].
Even if only the first operation means is operated in the first effective period, the display mode of the first effective period display is continuously changed [for example, FIG. 112 (b1) ~ As shown in Fig. 13 (b3) and Fig. 113 (a1), the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continue even if the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated. Etc.]
Even if only the second operation means is operated during the first effective period, the display mode of the first effective period display is continuously changed [for example, the right button 137d is operated. Even if only the effect button 136 is operated, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continuously decrease, etc.]
In the first effective period, the display of the first effective period display is terminated when both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (10) to (12) and FIG. 112 (c3) to (c5), both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are When operated, the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b are erased, and an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 shines is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display,
The operation promotion display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), and FIG. 113 (1). The operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be simultaneously operated within the effective period]
The first effective period is configured to start after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, after displaying the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), The operation valid period starts at the timing shown in 111 (9)],
The operation promotion display is an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation image [for example, right side shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), FIG. 113 (1)]). The right button image 137dP1 etc. imitating the button 137d].
The operation promotion display is an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation image [eg, shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), FIG. 113 (1)]. A production button image 136P1 or the like imitating the button 136].
The first effective period display corresponding to the first operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] and the first The first valid period display corresponding to the second operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “in the first effective period, the display of the first effective period display is ended when there is an operation of the second operating means during the operation of the first operating means. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated with the right button 137d being operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and the effect is movable. Effect display as if the body 225 is shining, etc.]
In the first effective period, the display of the first effective period display is ended when there is an operation of the second operating means during the operation of the second operating means. [For example, when the right button 137d is operated in a state where the effect button 136 is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display,
The operation promotion display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), and FIG. 113 (1). The operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be simultaneously operated within the effective period]
The first effective period is configured to start after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, after displaying the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), The operation valid period starts at the timing shown in 111 (9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effective period is a period that starts during execution of the symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 111 (9) to FIG. 12 (12), FIG. 112 (c1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 113 (a1) to FIG. 113 (a2), the operation valid period starts during the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the volume setting display is displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means in the second effective period [for example, FIG. 111 (2) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 (3), the volume gauge VG is displayed when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated during the operation valid period for the volume setting.
The second valid period is a period during which the volume setting operation is valid.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the first effective period and the second effective period do not overlap [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, Until the symbol variation display ends, the display of the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “in the first effective period, the operation result display is displayed when the second operation unit is operated during the operation of the first operation unit [for example, 112 (c1) to 112 (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed. ],
In the first effective period, the operation result display is displayed when the operation of the first operation means is performed during the operation of the second operation means [for example, an effect button When the right button 137d is operated while operating 136, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, when the second operation means is being operated while the volume setting display is being displayed, the display mode of the volume setting display is not changed even if the volume setting operation is performed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to (g), the volume is not changed when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, a “door body [for example, front frame door 106 etc.] is provided,
The door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means,
The player can operate the first operating means and the second operating means at the same time with one hand [for example, a ball provided on the front frame door 106 as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with a storage tray so that the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the first operation unit when the first operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 400 As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control in accordance with the operation of each button constituting the operation key unit 137],
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the second operation unit when the second operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 90. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs a control according to the operation button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate (for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.)
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
The configuration relating to the game machine can be set by operating the first operating means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (2) to (3) and 127 (2) to (3). When the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 111 (5) and FIG. 127 (4) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 5 (5), when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one level.
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12), etc.]
When both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 111. As shown in (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG.
In a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 127 (11 ), When only the effect button 136 and the right button 137d of the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 127 (12), or FIG. 11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 128 (12).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Further, according to this game table, the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Moreover, the display means, the sound output means, the light emitting means, the movable body, and the design means by displaying the design by causing the light guide plate to emit light can be appropriately used as the effecting means. Further, the rendering means such as a combination of display means and sound output means or a combination of display means and light emitting means may be constituted by a plurality of means.

  Further, only the settings relating to the gaming table may be configured by the operation of the first operating means, or other than the settings related to the gaming table may be configured by operating the first operating means. . In addition, it may be configured that the setting related to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting related to the gaming table may not be possible by operating the first operating means. .

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first effect may be executed. The first effect may also be executed in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first operation means When both the second operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first effect may be executed, or the first When both the operating means and the second operating means are operated, an effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed, In a state where only one of the operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that effects other than the first effect are not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
The first effect is configured to be executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation effective period, the effect movable body 225 displays the decorative symbols. The display moves to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, an operation promotion notification image or the like shown in FIG. 111 (8)],
The first display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means,
The first display is a display including an image simulating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image [eg, right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 111 (8)]”). Yes,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image [eg, an effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 111 (8)]”). Yes,
The first display is an effective period display relating to the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 111 (8) and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b shown in FIG. 129 (8). Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, by providing the first effective period, it is possible to increase the difficulty of operating the plurality of operation means, and thus it may be possible to increase the sense of achievement.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first effect is configured to be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, it may be executed in a case other than when the first operating means and the second operating means are both operated in the first effective period. May be. In addition, the first effect may be configured to be executed whenever the first operation unit and the second operation unit are both operated in the first effective period. And it may be constituted so that it may not be performed when it will be in the state where both the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means are operated in the 1st effective period.

  In addition, the first effect is configured to be executed only when the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated only in the first effective period. Alternatively, it may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated even in an effective period other than the first effective period. May be.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

  Further, the first display may be a display prompting only to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means, or both the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. The display may be a prompt other than the operation.

  The first display may be a display including only the first image, the second image, and the effective period display, or may include displays other than the first image, the second image, and the effective period display. It may be a display. The first display may be a display that necessarily includes the first image, the second image, and the effective period display, or may not include the first image, the second image, and the effective period display. There may be.

“The first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operating means out of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 11) to (12), the right button image 137dP1 is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.]
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 128 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the effect button image 136P1 is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated.
The first image is an image that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (12), the right button image 137dP1 is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
The second image is an image that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (12), the effect button image 136P1 is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first image imitating the first operation means and the second image imitating the second operation means are prevented from disappearing when only one operation means is operated. By this, it can alert | report that effective operation is not performed. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to effectively prompt the player to operate a plurality of operation means.

  Here, the first image may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means. Even when an operating means other than is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

  In addition, the second image may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or other than the first operation means and the second operation means. Even when the operating means is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

  Further, the first image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first image It may disappear even in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. Further, the first image may always disappear when both of the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means When both of the second operation means are operated, it may not disappear.

  Further, the second image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first image It may disappear even in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. In addition, the second image may always disappear when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, or the first operation unit When both of the second operation means are operated, it may not disappear.

Further, “the first display includes only one effective period display [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation promotion notification image includes a remaining time display bar 136P2. Only one included],
The effective period display is a display suggesting the remaining period of the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period, etc.]
The effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. As shown in (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, so that it is possible to recognize that an effective operation has been performed. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the effective period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first effective period, or may indicate other than the remaining period of the first effective period. The effective period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first effective period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first effective period.

  The effective period display may notify the remaining period of the first effective period.

  The effective period display may disappear only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the first operation means It may disappear even in cases other than when both of the second operating means are operated. The effective period display may always disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the operation means are operated.

Further, “the effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 127 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12) and FIG. 128 (11) to FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. If only the production button 136 is operated, it will not be erased]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effective period display does not disappear, so that an effective operation is not performed. In some cases, it is possible to prompt the player to appropriately operate the first operating means and the second operating means.

  Here, the effective period display may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or other than the first operation means and the second operation means. Even when the operating means is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

In addition, the first display includes two effective period displays. [For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (8), the operation promotion notification image includes remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b. 2 included etc.],
The effective period display is a display indicating the remaining period of the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period, etc.] ,
One of the two effective period displays (hereinafter referred to as “two effective period displays”) is an effective period display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first effective period display [for example, 129 (8), the remaining time display bar 136P2b etc. displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1].
One of the two effective period displays is an effective period display corresponding to the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display [eg, effect button image shown in FIG. 129 (8)]. The remaining time display bar 136P2a etc. displayed corresponding to 136P1].
The first effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated [for example, FIG. 129 (11)]. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2b is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
The second effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated [for example, FIG. 129 (11)]. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2a is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  If it is configured so that only the effective period display corresponding to the operated operation means disappears, it is misunderstood that an appropriate operation is performed by the player when each operation means is operated without performing an appropriate operation. However, according to this game machine, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effective period display and the second effective period are displayed. Since the display may be erased, it may be possible to recognize that an effective operation has been performed.

  Here, the first display may include only two effective period displays, or may include three or more.

  The effective period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first effective period, or may indicate other than the remaining period of the first effective period. The effective period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first effective period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first effective period.

  The effective period display may notify the remaining period of the first effective period.

  In addition, the first effective period display may disappear only when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, It may disappear even when the operating means and the second operating means are both operated. Further, the first effective period display may always disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and There may be a case where it does not disappear when both the second operating means are operated.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. It may disappear even when the operating means and the second operating means are both operated. Further, the second effective period display may always disappear when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means There may be a case where it does not disappear when both the second operating means are operated.

Further, “the first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, The time display bar 136P2b is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.]
The first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2b is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated.
The second effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, a remaining time display bar 136P2a is not erased when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.]
The second effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2a is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effective period display and the second effective period display do not disappear. It can be notified that an effective operation is not performed, and therefore, it may be possible to prompt the player to appropriately operate the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Here, the first effective period display may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. Even if an operating means other than the operating means is operated, the operating means may not disappear.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or the first operation means and the second operation display may be displayed. Even if an operating means other than the means is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

“The first effective period is a period in which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are effective [for example, shown in FIG. 111 (9). A period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the right button 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are enabled at the timing is started, or it is effective that both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated. Period (operation valid period), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. It may be a period in which the operation of the operation means other than both of the operation means is valid. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are necessarily effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. There may be cases where both operations of the operating means are not valid.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the first effective period is configured to be displayed [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 127 (8) is displayed. After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be easy to recognize that the first valid period is started.

  Here, after the display of the first display is started, only the first validity period may be started, or after the display of the first display is started, An effective period other than the effective period may be started. Further, the first valid period may be surely started after the display of the first display is started, or the first display is started after the display of the first display is started. The validity period may not be started.

  In addition, the first valid period may be configured to start only after the display of the first display is started, or even after the display of the first display is started. The validity period may be started.

In addition, “the setting regarding the game machine” is “a setting for executing the power saving mode [for example, eco mode, etc.]”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, ““ Settings related to the game machine ”means“ time setting ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display [For example, as illustrated in FIG. 111 (12), the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2 Operation result presentation has begun during]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, and thus, for example, it can be applied to a notice effect, and the expectation of a big hit may be further enhanced.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect may be one that may be executed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be executed other than during the symbol variation display. It may be. Further, the first effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A plurality of operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137 a, a lower button 137 b, a left button 137 c, a right button 137 d, a decision button 137 e, a cancel button 137 f, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate. A playground,
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.)
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
One of the plural types of notifications is a second notification [e.g., deletion of the symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) or reach state entry notification image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.]
In the first effective period, the first notification may be executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously during the operation effective period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. Etc.],
The first notification is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated in the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 127 (12), If the operation result effect is not performed or only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 128 (11), as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , Operation result production is not performed, etc.]
In the second effective period, the second notification may be executed when the first operating means is operated [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5) When the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is displayed, the sound volume is fixed to the set value, and the symbol changing setting screen may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). As shown in FIG. 107, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed.
The first effective period and the second effective period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, Until the change display is completed, the display of the setting screen for changing the symbol including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation effective period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to (j) and FIG. 111 (7) to FIG. 12 (12) are valid operation periods, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game stand, a game stand having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  Further, according to this game table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Moreover, it may be configured such that only a plurality of types of notifications can be executed, may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of types of notifications.

  In addition, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. The first notification may be executed even in a case other than when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. Also good. Further, the first notification may be surely executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. And when it will be in the state where both the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means are operated, it may be constituted so that the 1st information may not be performed.

  Further, only the first notification may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, a notification other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

  In addition, only the first effect is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, in a state where only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that an effect other than the first effect is not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

  The second notification may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, or the first operation means is operated. In other cases, the second notification may be executed. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, the second notification may be executed without fail, or when the first operation means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12), etc.]
The first notification is the first performance,
The second notification is a notification of the result of the setting operation [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) is displayed, the volume is set to a set value. Etc., and the symbol change setting screen will be deleted]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first operation means may be used for different purposes.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (i),
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
The first notification is the first performance,
The second notification is the second performance.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first operation means may be shared by different effects.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

In addition, 'the first operation means is an operation means that can be changed into a plurality of states,
The state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the first operating means in the second effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), In the first effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. The button lamp 138 is lit in red and the vibration is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the difference in necessary operations between the first effective period and the second effective period can be recognized due to the difference in the state of the first operation means.

  Here, the first operation means may be capable of changing only to a plurality of states, or may be capable of changing to a state other than the plurality of states. The first operating means may always change to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states.

  Further, there may be a case where only the state of the first operating means in the first effective period and the state of the first operating means in the second effective period may be different, or the first operation in the first effective period The state other than the state of the first operating means in the second effective period may be different from the state of the means. In addition, the state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the first operating means in the second effective period, or the state of the first operating means in the first effective period There may be a case where the state of the first operating means in the second effective period is not different.

“One of the plurality of states is a first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates. State etc.]
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and the operation such as vibration is performed. State that is not broken]
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the first state than in the second state during the first effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), During the effective period, the effect button 136 is lit red and vibrated by the chance button lamp 138],
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state in the second effective period [e.g., as shown in FIG. During the effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and the vibration or the like is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by vibrating the first operation means.

  Here, the first operating means may be in the first state during the first effective period, or may be in the second state. Further, the first operating means may be in the first state during the second effective period, or may be in the second state. Further, the first operating means may be always in the first state or not necessarily in the second state during the first effective period. Further, the first operating means may be always in the second state during the second effective period, or may not necessarily be in the first state.

In addition, “a plurality of light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418, etc.]
One of the plurality of light emitting means is a first light emitting means [for example, a chance button lamp 138, etc.]
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first operating means,
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means capable of emitting light with a plurality of types of light emission patterns,
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a first light emission pattern [for example, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in red as shown in FIG. 140 (11)]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a second light emission pattern [for example, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in blue as shown in FIG. 140 (4)]. Yes,
The first light emission pattern and the second light emission pattern are different light emission patterns,
The first state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the first light emission pattern,
The second state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the second light emission pattern.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by the light emission pattern of the first operation means.

  Here, the first light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only with a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may be capable of emitting light with a light emitting pattern other than the plurality of types of light emitting patterns. Further, the first light emitting means may necessarily emit light with a plurality of types of light emission patterns, or may not emit light with a plurality of types of light emission patterns.

In addition, “the first operation means is an operation means configured to be capable of vibrating at least partially,
The first state is a state where at least a part of the first operating means is vibrating [for example, a state where the effect button 136 is vibrating as shown in FIG. 137 (n), etc.] ,
The second state is a state where the first operation means does not vibrate [for example, a state where the effect button 136 is not vibrated as shown in FIG. 137 (d), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by vibration of the first operation means.

  Here, a part of the first operating means may be configured to be able to vibrate, or may be configured to be able to vibrate entirely. Further, at least a part of the first operation means may be configured to be able to vibrate, or at least a part other than a part may be configured to be able to vibrate. Further, the first operating means may be configured such that at least a part of the first operating means always vibrates, or at least a part of the first operating means may not vibrate.

The first operating means is an operating means configured to be rotatable at least partially.
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is rotating,
The second state is a state where the first operating means is not rotating.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by rotation of the first operation means.

  Here, a part of the first operating means may be configured to be rotatable, or the whole may be configured to be rotatable. Further, at least a part of the first operation means may be configured to be rotatable, or at least a part other than the part may be configured to be rotatable. Further, the first operating means may be configured so that at least a part of the first operating means rotates, or at least a part of the first operating means may not rotate.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effective period is a period that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display [For example, as illustrated in FIG. The first valid period has started, etc.]
In the first effective period, when the first operating means is not in the first state, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the first state is in the first state [for example, As shown in FIG. 137 (m), when the production button 136 vibrates in the first effective period, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, both the first operating means and the second operating means can make a notice with one operating means in addition to the effect by operating, so the range of effects of the operating means is widened. There is a case.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effective period may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started even when the symbol variation display is not being performed. Also good. The first effective period may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Further, in the first effective period, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed with the symbol variation display only when the first operating means is in the first state, or in the first effective period, Even in cases other than the case where one operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may be easily displayed with the symbol variation display. Further, in the first effective period, when the first operating means is in the first state, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed by the symbol variation display, or in the first effective period, When one operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, only in the first effective period, when the first operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the first state. In addition, even in a period other than the first effective period, it is easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display when the first operating means is in the first state than when the first operating means is not in the first state. You may do it.

  Further, in the first effective period, the first operation means may be always in the first state, or the first operation means may not be in the first state.

  Further, the first operating means may be in the second state in the first effective period, and the first operating means is in the first state than in the case where the first intention operating means is in the second state in the first effective period. In the case of the state, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed by the symbol variation display.

In addition, “a plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.] A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
One of the plural types of notifications is a second notification [e.g., deletion of the symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) or reach state entry notification image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.]
In the first effective period, the first notification may be executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously during the operation effective period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. Etc.],
The first notification is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated in the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 127 (12), If the operation result effect is not performed or only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 128 (11), as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , Operation result production is not performed, etc.]
In the second effective period, the second notification may be executed when the first operating means is operated [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5) When the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is displayed, the sound volume is fixed to the set value, and the symbol changing setting screen may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). As shown in FIG. 107, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed.
The first effective period and the second effective period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, Until the change display is completed, the display of the setting screen for changing the symbol including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation valid period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to (j) 111 (7) to FIG. 12 (12) are valid operation periods, etc.]
The state of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the second operating means in the second effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), In the first effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. The button lamp 138 is lit in red and the vibration is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game stand, a game stand having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  Further, according to this game table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the difference in required operation in a 1st effective period and a 2nd effective period may be recognized by the difference in the state of a 2nd operation means.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Moreover, it may be configured such that only a plurality of types of notifications can be executed, may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of types of notifications.

  In addition, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. The first notification may be executed even in a case other than when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. Also good. Further, the first notification may be surely executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. And when it will be in the state where both the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means are operated, it may be constituted so that the 1st information may not be performed.

  Further, only the first notification may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, a notification other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

  In addition, only the first effect is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, in a state where only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that an effect other than the first effect is not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

  The second notification may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, or the first operation means is operated. In other cases, the second notification may be executed. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, the second notification may be executed without fail, or when the first operation means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

  The second operating means may be capable of changing only to a plurality of states, or may be capable of changing to a state other than a plurality of states. The second operating means may always change to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states.

  Further, there may be a case where only the state of the second operation means in the first effective period and the state of the second operation means in the second effective period may be different, or the second operation in the first effective period. The state other than the state of the second operating means in the second effective period may be different from the state of the means. Further, the state of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the second operating means in the second effective period, or the state of the second operating means in the first effective period There may be a case where the state of the second operating means in the second effective period is not different.

In addition, “the first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are valid [for example, the right button at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9) The period (operation effective period) in which the operation of 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are each started (operation effective period), or the period in which both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated (operation effective) The period) is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. It may be a period in which the operation of the operation means other than both of the operation means is valid. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are necessarily effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. There may be cases where both operations of the operating means are not valid.

In addition, “the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate (for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.)
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 129 (12), etc.]
When both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 129. As shown in (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 129 (12), etc.]
In a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 127 (11 ), When only the effect button 136 and the right button 137d of the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 127 (12), or FIG. 11) and FIG. 130 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12) and FIG. 130 (12), The operation result effect is not performed, or as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″) and FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), both the upper button 137a and the effect button 136 are the same instead of the right button 137d. When operated at times, an effect different from the operation result effect shown in FIG. 130 (12) (second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) and FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). Operation result presentation may be performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Further, according to this game table, the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Moreover, the display means, the sound output means, the light emitting means, the movable body, and the design means by displaying the design by causing the light guide plate to emit light can be appropriately used as the effecting means. Further, the rendering means such as a combination of display means and sound output means or a combination of display means and light emitting means may be constituted by a plurality of means.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first effect may be executed. The first effect may also be executed in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first operation means When both the second operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first effect may be executed, or the first When both the operating means and the second operating means are operated, an effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed, In a state where only one of the operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that effects other than the first effect are not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

“One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect [for example, the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″”) and the result of FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). Operation result presentation etc.]
The first effect and the third effect are different effects,
In the first effective period, the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 129 (7) to (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation effective period, the effect movable body 225 displays the decorative symbols. In addition to moving to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining, and a definite sound is output from the speaker 120],
The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″) and FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), when both the up button 137a and the effect button 136 are operated simultaneously instead of the right button 137d, FIG. When an effect different from the operation result effect shown in (12) (second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) or operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″)) is performed. In FIG. 129 (11), there is a case where a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect is performed by any one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means fails (when only one operating means is operated), the third effect different from the first effect is achieved. Therefore, there may be a case where a player's sense of achievement can be given when the first performance is performed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, even if the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means fails, the dissatisfaction of the player is alleviated by executing another effect (third effect). There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the third effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the third effect. Further, the effect means may always execute the third effect, or may not execute the third effect.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first effective period. The first effect may also be executed in a case other than when the first operating means and the second operating means are both operated in the first effective period. May be configured. Further, the first effect may be configured to be always executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated in the first effective period. In the first effective period, the first effect may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Good.

  In addition, only in the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be executed. The first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in a period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

  Further, the third effect may be executed only when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, in the first effective period, the third effect may be executed in addition to the case where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the first effective period, the third effect may be always executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. Even if only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the first effective period, the third effect may not be executed. Good.

  Further, the third effect may be executed only in the first effective period when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in a period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

In addition, the production means includes first production means [for example, production movable body 225, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and second production means [for example, speaker 120, production movable body 225, etc.]. Means,
The first effect means and the second effect means are different effect means,
The first effect is an effect that is executed by using both the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is decorated. It moves to the front side of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, and a definite sound is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the front side and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 is shining]
The third effect is an effect that is executed using any one of the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, FIG. 131 (12 ''') As shown, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but there is no definite sound output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) In the center of the display area of the symbol display device 208, a character display “Gekiatsu” is made, and an operation result display including a display in which ten pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is performed around the character display. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the first effect can be executed as a flashy effect than the third effect, and the player's first operation means and second operation means are operated simultaneously. It may be possible to improve the sense of achievement.

  Here, the effect means may be configured to include only the first effect means and the second effect means, or may include effect means other than the first effect means and the second effect means. It may be configured by. Further, the production means may be configured to include the first production means and the second production means, or includes at least one of the first production means and the second production means. There may be no cases.

  The first effect may be executed only using both the first effect unit and the second effect unit, or an effect other than the first effect unit and the second effect unit. It may also be executed using means. The first effect may be always executed using both the first effect means and the second effect means, or both the first effect means and the second effect means may be performed. It may not be executed using.

  In addition, the third effect may be executed using only one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the first effect means. It may be executed by using a production means other than any one of the two production means. In addition, the third effect may be executed by using any one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the first effect means. It may be executed without using any one of the two effect means.

In addition, the first rendering means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The second effect means is a movable means [for example, the effect movable body 225 or the like]
The movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movable effects,
One of the plurality of types of movable effects is a first movable effect,
The first movable effect is a movable effect in which at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means [for example, the effect movable body 225 is located above the decorative symbol display device 208. To the front side of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, etc.]
The third effect is an effect that is executed without using the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), the effect movable body 225 does not operate and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the display area of the device 208, a character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed, and an operation result display including a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is performed around the character display]
The first effect is an effect including the first movable effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display related to the first movable effect [for example, an effect display as shown in FIG. 129 (12) in which the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.]
The first effect is an effect including the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the first movable effect is performed only when the first operation means and the second operation means are successfully operated simultaneously, there may be a case where a sense of achievement can be given to the player. is there.

  Here, the movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of movable effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of types of movable effects. In addition, the movable means may always execute a plurality of types of movable effects, or may not execute the movable effects of confused alcoholic beverages.

  Further, the movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the movable effect may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, the first movable effect may move only to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or move forward in front of the display area of the display means. In addition to the overlapping position, at least a part of the means may move to a position. Further, the first movable effect may always move to a position where at least part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or the movable means in front of the display area of the display means. There may be a case where at least a part of each does not move to an overlapping position.

  In addition, the third effect may be executed without using only the second effect means, or may be executed without using any effect means other than the second effect means. Good. The third effect may be executed without using the second effect means, or may be executed using the second effect means.

  The first effect may include only the first movable effect, or may include effects other than the first movable effect. The first effect may necessarily include the first movable effect, or may not include the first movable effect.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  In addition, the second display may be a display related only to the first movable effect, or may be a display related to other than the first movable effect. The second display may be a display that is always related to the first movable effect, or may not be related to the first movable effect.

  In addition, the first effect may include only the second display, or may include a display other than the second display. The first effect may necessarily include the second display, or may not include the second display.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8)],
The third display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Of which the right button image 137dP1 is not included]
The third display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means [For example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 The production button image 136P1 is included, etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8) is displayed in the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means can be made to function as a hidden command by not displaying an image simulating the first operating means in the first effective period. In some cases, it may be possible to give a rare value to the appearance of the first performance.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display or may not display the third display.

  Further, the third display may not include only an image imitating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the first operation means. . The third display may not necessarily include an image imitating the first operation means, or may include an image imitating the first operation means.

  Further, the third display may include only an image imitating the second operation means, or may include an image other than an image imitating the second operation means. Further, the third display may necessarily include an image simulating the second operation means, or may not include an image simulating the second operation means.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed during the first effective period, or may not be displayed during the first effective period.

  Further, the third display may only be displayed during the first effective period.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8)],
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means. [For example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. Of which the right button image 137dP1 is not included]
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Our production button image 136P1 is not included]
The fourth display is a display including a display relating to the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8) includes the remaining time display bar 136P2],
The fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8) is displayed in the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, only the display relating to the first effective period may be displayed, and in order to allow the player to perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect There is.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be able to alert | report that it is a hidden button effect by the display regarding a 1st effective period.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  The fourth display may not include only an image imitating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than the image imitating the first operation means. . Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the first operation means, or may include an image imitating the first operation means.

  Further, the fourth display may not include only an image imitating the second operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the second operation means. . Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the second operation means, or may include an image imitating the second operation means.

  Further, the fourth display may include only a display relating to the first effective period, or may include a display other than the display relating to the first effective period. Further, the fourth display may necessarily include a display regarding the first effective period, or may not include a display regarding the first effective period.

  The fourth display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed during the first effective period, or may not be displayed during the first effective period.

  Further, the fourth display may only be displayed during the first effective period.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B)],
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Of which the right button image 137dP1 is not included]
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Our production button image 136P1 is not included]
The fifth display is a display that does not include a display relating to the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B) does not include a remaining time display bar, etc.]
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B) is displayed in the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the player can be allowed to perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be able to alert | report that it is a hidden button effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only an image imitating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the first operation means. . In addition, the fifth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the first operation means, or may include an image imitating the first operation means.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only an image imitating the second operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the second operation means. . Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the second operation means, or may include an image imitating the second operation means.

  The fifth display may not include only the display relating to the first effective period, or may include no display other than the display relating to the first effective period. Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include the display regarding the first effective period, and may include the display regarding the first effective period.

  The fifth display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed during the first effective period, or may not be displayed during the first effective period.

  Further, the fifth display may only be displayed during the first effective period.

In addition, “a configuration relating to a gaming machine can be performed by operating the first operating means [for example, FIG. 111 (2) to FIG. 3 (3) and FIG. 127 (2) to FIG. When the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, a symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 111 (5) and FIG. 127 ( 4) to (5), when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the volume increases by one level, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first operation means may be used for different purposes.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the settings relating to the gaming table can be performed by the operation of the first operating means, or other than the settings relating to the gaming table can be configured by operating the first operating means. Good. In addition, it may be configured that the setting related to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting related to the gaming table may not be possible by operating the first operating means. .

In addition, “the setting regarding the game machine” is “a setting for executing the power saving mode [for example, eco mode, etc.]”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, ““ Settings related to the game machine ”means“ time setting ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may start during execution of the symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2 Operation result presentation has begun during]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, and thus, for example, it can be applied to a notice effect, and the expectation of a big hit may be further enhanced.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect may be one that may be executed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be executed other than during the symbol variation display. It may be. Further, the first effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A notice means capable of executing multiple kinds of notices;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means,
The on-hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”).
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number larger than the first number than the case where the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons is consumed by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to win if the number of two is digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same form as the notice form,
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one time symbol variation display is executed. It is configured so that is more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A holding display means capable of executing display according to the holding number;
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
In a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is being executed, the notice icon may be digested to the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon that is digested in the period during which the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number;
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may start as the notice icon,
The first notice icon that has been displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 15 or 16,
As the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During a single symbol variation display, the second number of the first notice icons is digested rather than the first number of the first notice icons being digested. Easy to become,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the digested symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the prefetch effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Providing production control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 27,
Main control means;
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying in the hold display area a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the big hit is when the second number digest is larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become,
The second display means displays in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second figure change display”), which is a target of prefetching, is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to appendix 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form,
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
A gaming machine according to attachment 33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a holding display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming machine according to appendix 34,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
In the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by the fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display according to the number of suspensions is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 38,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
The notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start displaying,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40,
The hold display area is an area that can display up to a seventh number according to the number of holds,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42,
Main control means;
Production control means;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple notice icons”) may be digested until the end,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In a single symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first number of notice icons”) is digested, so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by showing the number of the notice icons as the symbol fluctuation before the reservation to be prefetched.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, an effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, and when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding presentation display B may be performed, or the presentation display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. May be performed.

  In addition, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to appendix 45,
Even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “second number of notice icons”) is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers;
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon including one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol variation display. If the first effect display is not displayed, there may be a case where a player who can see the first effect display can be given a sense of superiority.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be digested without fail.

  In addition, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured such that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to appendix 45 or 46,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  In addition, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
48. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 45 to 47,
In the case where the loss symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”), which is a prefetch target, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a case of loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or the case of the loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is the case where the result of the symbol variation display to be prefetched is a big hit or a case of loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-read target is a big hit or a case of a loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game machine, even if a notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 49,
With hold display means,
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on hold (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The on-hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to appendix 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

(Appendix 52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern appears by applying a lens cut to the light guide plate and irradiating with a light source from the side. , May be constituted by light emitting means such as LED, or may be constituted by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the notice icon being stocked, a display related to the notice icon being digested, or a notice of the notice icon stock. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming machine according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  One notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect that a notice icon is digested with a 2nd display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed.
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may also be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means where the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine according to appendix 59,
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be cases where the first movable means effect is not performed. Means effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect with a different operation).

  Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be given by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon is digested. Then, the production by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to appendix 59 or 60,
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed. When the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be performed.

(Appendix 62)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 61,
With operating means,
The movable means is the operating means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operation means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 62,
Comprising a second movable means;
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed. When the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only with one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to appendix 64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the change at which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that a notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
One icon of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasses in which the notice icon does not increase.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
Of the eleventh number of the notice icons indicated by the notice icon increase suggestion display, the twelfth number of the notice icons may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means;
Hold indication means,
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern change display”) to be read ahead is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
In the case where the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming machine according to appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a pre-read display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game stand according to appendix 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth hold display”) of the loss symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pattern change display”), which is the target of prefetching, is displayed. The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanation display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanation display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and the frequency of occurrence of one notification effect are changed. There are modes to make it happen.

  In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be displayed in advance of the animation display position in the middle. The icon display position may be closer to the second display area.

  Here, the “notice icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only some of the notice icons, or may be all of the notice icons. The notice icon may be used. Further, the “notice icon” may be only a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of notice icons including a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. The display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon need not be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. In addition, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, and the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display is not performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game stand according to appendix 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the current and next symbol change display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give a new expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading notice display is digested.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be necessarily digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayed only by a single icon, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of icons. Here, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 76,
The second display area is an area partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
“The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed” as described in Supplementary Note 71. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed. "
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
The number of the notice icons is consumed more in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is lost,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The big hit fluctuation is more digested than the loss fluctuation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to appendix 80, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The game stand according to appendix 81,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 82,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current stage of production,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game stand according to appendix 83, wherein
Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the stage is changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of notification icons”) as the notification icon.
One icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first performance,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display;
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The game stand according to appendix 86,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming machine according to appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 89,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 90,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming machine according to appendix 91, wherein
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

  The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the expectation degree of reach for the reach.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the expected degree of jackpot of the character.

  The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first notice display.

  It should be noted that the term “notice icon” described so far is named for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience by the display mode (motif), and may be called a notice item when the notice icon is a tool, and called a notice character when the notice icon is a character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , A notice medal). In addition, the term “notice” in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be called as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

(Appendix 93)
A plurality of operation means provided at positions operable by the player;
Production means capable of performing the first production;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
By the operation of the first operation means, it is possible to set a gaming table,
In the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the first effect is configured to be performed,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine according to appendix 93,
A display means capable of displaying the first display;
The first display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image”),
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image”),
The first display is a display including an effective period display related to the first effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
A gaming machine according to attachment 94,
The effective period display in the first display is one,
The effective period display is a display suggesting the remaining period of the first effective period,
The effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated,
The effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
A gaming machine according to appendix 94 or 95,
The first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is an image that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated,
The second image is an image that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
A gaming machine according to attachment 94,
The effective period display in the first display is two,
One of the two effective period displays is an effective period display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first effective period display”),
One of the two effective period displays is an effective period display corresponding to the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display”),
The first effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated,
The second effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 98)
A gaming machine according to appendix 97,
The first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated,
The second image is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is a display that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated,
The second image is a display that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 98,
The “setting operation related to the gaming table” described in the supplementary note 93 is an eco-mode setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 98,
The “setting operation related to the game machine” described in the supplementary note 93 is a time setting setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 93 to 100,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 101,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 101,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
A gaming table provided with a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by a player,
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
When both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first effective period, an operation result notification (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”) is performed. Is configured to be
The first notification is not performed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated in the first effective period. Is composed of
In the second effective period, when the first operating means is being operated, notification of the operation result (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”) is performed,
The first validity period and the second validity period are different periods;
The aspect of the first operation means in the first effective period may be different from the aspect of the first operation means in the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A gaming machine according to appendix 104,
The first notification is an effect,
The second notification is notification of the result of the setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
A gaming machine according to appendix 104,
The first notification is a first effect,
The second notification is a second effect,
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 104 to 106,
The first operation means is a means capable of taking a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the first aspect more easily than the second aspect in the first effective period,
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the second aspect more easily than the first aspect in the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
A gaming machine according to appendix 107,
In the first aspect, the first operating means emits light in a first light emission pattern.
In the second aspect, the first operating means emits light in a second light emission pattern.
The first light emission pattern and the light emission pattern of the valley are different light emission patterns.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
A gaming machine according to appendix 107,
The first operation means is a means in which at least a part of the first operation means is configured to be vibrated,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least a part of the first operating means vibrates,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means does not vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
A gaming machine according to appendix 107,
The first operating means is a means in which at least a part of the first operating means is configured to be rotatable,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least a part of the first operating means rotates,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means does not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 107 to 110,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first operation means is a means that may take the first aspect during the first effective period,
In the case where the first operating means takes the first mode during the first effective period, the symbol according to the big hit is more easily determined and displayed when the second mode is used. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to 111,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to 112,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to 112,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 115)
A gaming table comprising a plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by a player,
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
In the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the operation result is notified,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the operation result is not notified. Configured,
In the second effective period, when the first operating means is in a state of being operated, the operation result is notified,
The first validity period and the second validity period are different periods;
The aspect of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the aspect of the second operating means in the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 116)
A plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
Production means capable of performing multiple productions;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
In the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the first effect is configured to be performed,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 117)
The game stand according to appendix 116,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the second effect is configured to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 118)
The game stand according to appendix 117,
The production means is a means including a plurality of means,
One of the plurality of means is a first means,
One of the plurality of means is a second means,
The first means and the second means are different means,
The first effect is an effect performed using both the first means and the second means,
The second effect is an effect performed using one of the first means and the second means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 119)
The game stand according to appendix 118,
The first means is a display means,
The second means is a movable means,
The second effect is an effect performed without using the second means,
The first effect is an effect including an effect in which at least a part of the movable means is movable in front of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “movable effect”),
The first effect is an effect including a display effect related to the movable effect on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 120)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 119,
By the operation of the first operation means, it is configured to be able to perform a setting operation related to the game table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 121)
A gaming machine according to attachment 120, wherein
The “setting operation related to the game machine” described in the supplementary note 120 is an eco-mode setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 122)
A gaming machine according to attachment 120, wherein
The “setting operation related to the game machine” described in the supplementary note 120 is a time setting setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 123)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 122,
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image”),
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image”),
The second display is a display that does not include the first image,
The first display is a display displayed in association with a setting operation,
The first display is a display that may not be displayed in the first validity period,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 124)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 122,
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
One of the plurality of displays is a third display;
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image”),
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image”),
The second display is a display that does not include the first image,
The third display is an effective period display according to the first effective period,
The first display is a display that may not be displayed in the first validity period,
The second display is a display that may not be displayed in the first effective period,
The third display is a display that may be displayed even when the first display and the second display are not displayed in the first effective period.
A game hall characterized by that.

(Appendix 125)
The game stand according to appendix 124,
In the first effective period, there are cases where both the first image and the second image are not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 126)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 125,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 127)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 126,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 128)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 126,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example. For example, a game ball is enclosed in a main body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is used by being circulated in the main body of the pachinko machine. The present invention can also be applied to an expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  The gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, a spinning machine (slot machine) that uses medals or game balls (pachinko balls).

  Here, a slot machine (cylinder gaming machine) as a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1000 illustrated in FIG. 144 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 144), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the present embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Reel backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be irradiated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, every time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, two are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. A sheet is inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display unit 1025, the game information display unit 1026, and the payout number display unit 1027 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display unit.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operations of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual player's game history information), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Under the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

<Information display button>
FIG. 145 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and FIG. 145 (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. As shown in FIG. 145, the information display button 1046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 1050. That is, the information display button 1046 is a general term for a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 1050. Specifically, the information display button unit 1050 includes a determination (call) button 1046O provided in the approximate center of the information display button unit 1050, and a determination ( (Call) button 1046O, an upper selection button 1046U, a lower selection button 1046D, a left selection button 1046L, a right selection button 1046R, which are spaced apart on the left side, and a cancel, which is spaced apart on the right side of the enter (call) button 1046O. Button 1046C.

  The slot machine 1000 configured as described above is also configured to enable the above-described eco mode setting, original (daitomo) mode setting, time setting, and the like. For example, when a predetermined operation in the slot machine 1000 (for example, an operation of the chance button 1100 in the standby state) is performed, the setting screen is displayed (an example of a notification of the result of the setting operation). Various settings described above can be performed by appropriately operating the buttons constituting the button 1046.

  Further, for example, in an effect requesting a button operation, a specific button effect is performed in which both buttons of a chance button 1100 and an information display button 1046 (for example, the right selection button 1046R) are simultaneously operated. It may be configured. The buttons for requesting operations include a chance button 1100, a medal insertion button 1032, stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and buttons constituting the information display button 1046 (for example, an upper selection button 1046U, a lower selection button 1046D, a left selection button 1046L, and a right button). The selection button 1046R, the determination (call) button 1046O, and the cancel button 1046C) can be appropriately combined. Further, it may be operated in combination with the start lever 1035. Further, the title panel 1062 may be configured to be pressed and operated in combination with other buttons and the start lever 1035 so that a specific button effect is performed.

  In addition, the specific button effect described above is that the first stop operation is performed after the start lever 1035 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012, the first stop reel is stopped, and then the second stop operation is performed. It is possible to start at any timing after the second stop reel is stopped after the third stop operation is performed and the third stop reel is stopped. Further, it may be possible to start during a so-called freeze period in which the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is not accepted for a certain period of time. In addition, an RTC (Real Time Clock) may be provided and configured to be able to start in a simultaneous performance executed when a predetermined start time is detected by the RTC.

  Further, the operation valid period during which button operations can be accepted may be forcibly terminated by various operations controlled on the main control circuit side.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  As described above, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are only the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Production button 137a Up button 137b Down button 137c Left button 137d Right button 137e Decision button 208 Decorative design display device 212 First special drawing display device 214 Second special drawing display device 224 Production movable body 225 Production movable body 246 Shielding device 281 Reserved icon display area 285 of special figure 1 285 Notice icon display area 286 Production hold lamp 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 427 Production button initial position sensor 434 Production button drive motor 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Lamp for game board 542 Lamp for game stand frame

Claims (14)

A plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
When both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be executed, and
In the state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is configured not to be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The first effect and the third effect are different effects,
In the first effective period, the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. And
The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Being
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The production means is a means including a first production means and a second production means,
The first effect means and the second effect means are different effect means,
The first effect is an effect executed using both the first effect means and the second effect means,
The third effect is an effect that is executed using any one of the first effect means and the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The first rendering means is a display means,
The second rendering means is a movable means,
The movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movable effects,
One of the plurality of types of movable effects is a first movable effect,
The first movable effect is a movable effect that moves to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means,
The third effect is an effect executed without using the second effect means,
The first effect is an effect including the first movable effect,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display related to the first movable effect,
The first effect is an effect including the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
Provided with a display means that can display multiple types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means,
The third display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means,
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
Provided with a display means that can display multiple types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means,
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the second operation means,
The fourth display is a display including a display related to the first effective period,
The fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
Provided with a display means that can display multiple types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means,
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the second operation means,
The fifth display is a display that does not include a display related to the first effective period,
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed in the first validity period.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
By the operation of the first operation means, it is configured to be able to set a gaming table,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 8,
The “setting relating to the game machine” recited in claim 8 is “setting for executing the power saving mode”.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 8,
The “setting relating to the game machine” described in claim 8 is “time setting”.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.